JP2019208909A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of maintaining high design freedom degree of a game region.SOLUTION: Since a distribution device 300 delays vertical displacement of game balls by respective channel constitution parts 334-336, so that, even when vertical length of the respective channel constitution parts 334-336 in front view is reduced and a space is saved, a period until the game balls entered the respective channel constitution parts 334-336 pass a probability variation detection sensor becomes long. Therefore, a timing when a slide displacement member 370 should be displaced for switching propriety of game ball entry to the probability variation detection sensor can be set so that the timing is after the game ball entry to the respective channel constitution parts by a prescribed time, so that, without an operation in a short period of an opening/closing plate, a winning error can be suppressed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a distribution unit configured to be movable to the left and right is disposed in the flow path of the game ball that has entered the grand prize opening, and the flow direction of the game ball changes depending on the arrangement of the distribution unit There is a gaming machine that can be configured (Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-155538 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the degree of freedom in designing the game area is limited. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing a game area.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a path configuration means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a passed-through means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path configuration means to pass therethrough. And a state switching means configured to be switchable between a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the passing means and a second state different from the first state, wherein the path configuration means comprises a game ball Delay means for delaying the vertical displacement of the game ball, and the delay means is configured to allow the game ball to flow toward the passing means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow path is a rear flow side toward the front side. The acceleration of the game ball that flows down is configured to be larger than that of the flow path toward the head.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow path is a flow path toward the front side. The acceleration of the game ball that flows down is configured to be larger than the flow path that flows down while maintaining the front-rear position.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the design freedom of the game area can be maintained high.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to ensure a long period for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, it is possible to ensure a long period for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing on the near side.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a back perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning device, a collective basket, and a sorting device. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning device, a collective basket and a sorting device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a distribution apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a distribution apparatus. It is a front view of a receiving member and a distribution apparatus. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device along line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus and the allocation apparatus in the XVII-XVII line of FIG. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus and the allocation apparatus in the XVII-XVII line of FIG. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15. It is a front view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the sorting device in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16. It is a perspective view of the variable prize-winning device and the sorting device in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter and the hit in the normal symbol. It is the figure which showed the time change of the operation pattern of the opening-and-closing board of the variable winning device of the 1st round in each jackpot type, and the operation pattern of the slide displacement member of a distribution apparatus. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is a back perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in the production standby state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in the production standby state. It is a side view of the 1st operation unit in the arrow XLII direction view of FIG. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in the middle production state. It is a rear view of the first operation unit in the intermediate effect state. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in an overhanging state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in an overhanging state. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the displacement amount and displacement angle of a to-be-supported member accompanying the rotation displacement of a rotation member. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the driven side of a to-be-supported member when a rotation member rotates to the inclination direction in the aspect with constant angular velocity. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the angle accompanying rotation of a rotation member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a back case and a 2nd operation | movement unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a back case and the 2nd operation unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation | movement unit and center frame in the LIIa-LIIa line | wire of FIG. 28, (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation | movement unit and center frame in the LIIb-LIIb line | wire of FIG. is there. (A) is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation | movement unit and center frame in the LIIIa-LIIIa line | wire of FIG. 33, (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation | movement unit and center frame in the LIIIb-LIIIb line | wire of FIG. is there. (A) is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation | movement unit and center frame in the LIVa-LIVA line of FIG. 30, (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation | movement unit and center frame in the LIVb-LIVb line of FIG. is there. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a raising / lowering rendition effect device. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the up-and-down reversal effect device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. (A) is sectional drawing of the transmission apparatus holding | maintenance board in the LVIIIa-LVIIIa line | wire of Fig.57 (a), an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and an axial rotation member, (b) is FIG. It is sectional drawing of the transmission apparatus holding | maintenance board in the LVIIIb-LVIIIb line | wire of (b), an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. (A) to (c) are front views of the rendering device. It is a partial exploded front perspective view of the structure of the 3rd operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit. It is a partial exploded front perspective view of the structure of the 3rd operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate | middle arm member. (A) And (b) is a rear view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate | middle arm member. (A) And (b) is a front view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate | middle arm member. (A) And (b) is a front view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate | middle arm member. It is a timing chart which shows an example of arrangement | positioning of a raising / lowering arm member, the drive aspect of a drive motor, and the output of a detection sensor in a time series. It is sectional drawing of the 3rd operation | movement unit in the LXIX-LXIX line | wire of FIG. (A) to (d) is a schematic front view of an operation unit for schematically explaining an example of a combination operation of each operation unit in time series. (A) to (d) is a schematic front view of an operation unit for schematically explaining an example of a combination operation of each operation unit in time series.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 71, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the following description, the front side of the paper is the front (front) side and the back side of the paper is the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is left (left) ) Side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit, predetermined reach or the like, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The lending operation unit 40 includes a frequency display unit 41, a lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened on the left side. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails for ball guidance (shown below the center frame 86, and in the upper half of the game area). ), Windmill (not shown), rails 61, 62, general prize opening 63, first prize opening 64, second prize opening 140, variable prize winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display unit. 80 etc. are assembled | attached and the peripheral part is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (refer FIG. 1).

  The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and allows the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a tapping screw or the like is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by.

  The base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, it is possible to shield various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side of the center frame 86 so as to be invisible to the player.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 4R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot of maximum round number 4 rounds It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. The “4R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low-probability state after a jackpot of four rounds, and during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations) becomes a short-time state. is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment increases the jackpot probability for a predetermined number of fluctuations (in this embodiment, 100 fluctuations), and increases the probability of hitting the second symbol, which will be described later. This includes a game state in which a ball is likely to win a winning opening 140. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning opening 140 It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that a game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300, which will be described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is changed by 100. It becomes a high probability state for the number of times. If it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the gaming state after the big hit game is in the short-time state for 100 variations.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time that the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed. And a long time is set. When the electric accessory 140a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 140 compared to the case where the electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, the opening time of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 140a opens | releases rather than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time is short, and the electric accessory 140a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in a short time, the time that the electric accessory 140a associated with the second prize opening 140 is released or the number of times the electric accessory 140a is released per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  In this embodiment, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the back case 510 so as to fill an opening 511a of the back case 510, which will be described later, and the center frame 86 is arranged so as to border the window portion of the base plate 60. It is installed. That is, in front view, the center frame 86 seems to be disposed so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are disposed apart from each other in the front-rear direction. Has been.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of, for example, a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). The three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is kept for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 140a of the second winning opening 140 to be opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time reduction.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 140a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 140 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 140 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 140, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by turning on the second prize opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 140 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is awarded to the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is awarded to the second prize opening 140, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 140 may be five.

  The second winning port 140 is accompanied by an electric accessory 140a. The electric combination 140a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric combination 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to enter the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 140a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 140a is opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball is won at the first winning port 64 and when the ball is won at the second winning port 140. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 140, and the ball is in a state in which a ball can always be won.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 140 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change and the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 to be in an open state and to win the second winning opening 140. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probable big hit by winning the second winning opening 140.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetric, so that it can be aimed at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or the second winning port 140 by “left-handed”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is disposed below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual to give gaming value (game value). Is done.

  The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided to the unillustrated ball discharge path through the out opening 71. The out ports 71 are provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning port 65a.

  A number of nails are planted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately distribute and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged (not shown). ).

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register at the time of the power shutdown (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and an open / close plate 65b of a specific winning opening 65a (FIG. 11). A solenoid 209 comprising a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side around the lower side as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via an input / output port 205. Various commands and control signals are transmitted.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 631, 731, 782, 861.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, a motor, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300, and FIGS. 6A and 6B are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. 6A shows a closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b in which the opening / closing plate 65b is closed so as to restrict the flow of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a. In FIG. 6B, the opening to the specific winning opening 65a is illustrated. An open state of the opening / closing plate 65b is shown in which the opening / closing plate 65b is opened so as to allow the ball to flow down. 5 and 6 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIGS.

  In the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b (see FIG. 6B), the variable winning device 65 receives the ball landing on the opening / closing plate 65b and opens the opening / closing plate 65b so that it can be guided to the specific winning port 65a. The upper surface of the opening / closing plate 65b is inclined downward toward the back surface side.

  Since the electric accessory 140a is disposed above the left and right center portion of the opening / closing plate 65b (see FIG. 2), the sphere landing on the opening / closing plate 65b is limited to the sphere that flows away from the electric accessory 140a. . That is, the landing of the sphere on the opening / closing plate 65b does not occur in the left and right central portions, but mainly occurs in the left and right outer portions of the electric accessory 140a. In other words, the arrangement of the spheres landing on the opening / closing plate 65b is limited to a position closer to the left and right outer sides of the opening / closing plate 65b.

  The arrangement of the spheres after landing on the opening / closing plate 65b is not limited to this. That is, depending on how the spheres flow after landing on the opening / closing plate 65b, the spheres may be disposed closer to the center of the opening / closing plate 65b.

  In particular, in this embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric accessory 140a from the front side is curved so as to secure a space on the opening / closing plate 65b side (see the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1)). ) Is formed as a curved surface that protrudes downward from the lower end of the front end portion opposed to the rear surface side), so that the ball bounced near the left and right center position of the opening / closing plate 65b is connected to the front design member 141. The degree to which the momentum of collision is reduced can be reduced. Thereby, possibility that a ball | bowl will be arrange | positioned near the left-right center position of the opening-and-closing plate 65b can be raised.

  In addition, the center of the curvature radius of the curved shape of the lower part of the front design member 141 may be arrange | positioned in any front and back. In the present embodiment, the space on the side of the opening / closing plate 65b can be ensured to be larger by forming the radius of curvature in the lateral view so as to be arranged below the front side. In addition, since the width of the left and right ends of the front design member 141 decreases toward the lower side at the left and right ends, it is possible to easily secure a space between the left and right sides with the opening / closing plate 65b.

  In the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball landed on the opening / closing plate 65b is guided to the specific winning opening 65a with almost no leakage. On the front side of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that is inclined downward toward the rear is disposed at a vertical position where the ball can be guided to the ball passage hole 163b.

  The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right end portions of the lower surface portion 163a so that the balls rolled to the left and right outer sides by the lower surface portion 163a can transfer with less resistance. A guide plate portion 163a2 is formed on the left and right outer sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 in order to reduce the flow resistance of the sphere that has landed on the opening / closing plate 65b on the left and right outer sides than the inclined flow lower surface 163a1.

  The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-like portion extending from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner wall portions of the receiving member 163 to the front side and the left and right inner sides, and the front end surface is an inclined surface that is displaced rearward toward the left and right inner sides. It is formed.

  Thereby, when the ball that rides and rolls on the opening / closing plate 65b comes into contact with the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, it is possible to guide the flow of the ball along the inclination of the inclined surface. 163a1 can be guided with little resistance. Therefore, when the opening / closing plate 65b starts the closing operation with the ball on the opening / closing plate 65b, the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b is not performed even if the ball is disposed on the left and right outside of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1. The degree of inhibition can be reduced.

  That is, for example, the flow of the sphere deteriorates and the closing of the opening / closing plate 65b is delayed, or the ball that has flowed backward by the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b rebounds on the rear wall portion of the receiving member 163 and hits the opening / closing plate 65b again. By applying a load in the direction of opening the opening / closing plate 65b (front side), it is possible to reduce the possibility that the opening / closing plate 65b unintentionally opens or malfunctions.

  When the opening / closing plate 65b operates from the open state to the closed state, the opening / closing plate 65b is raised and closed. That is, the ball that has landed on the opening / closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning opening 65a by the operation of the opening / closing plate 65b. The ball on board is guided to the specific winning opening 65a with almost no leakage.

  At this time, the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b may be delayed if the arrangement of the balls on the opening / closing plate 65b is shifted to the left and right outside or the number of balls is large. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the shape of the lower surface part 163a, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 and the guide plate part 163a2 of the receiving member 163 is devised, the flow of the sphere guided to the specific winning port 65a is retained. In addition, the quickness of the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b can be maintained.

  Further, instead of devising the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening / closing plate 65b on which the ball rides in the open state is formed in a flat shape (see FIG. 6B). Therefore, the sphere that has landed on the opening / closing plate 65b in the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b once flows backward, and then flows in the left-right direction by the action of the shape of the receiving member 163, and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a ball collision on the opening / closing plate 65b.

  In other words, even when a plurality of balls land on the opening / closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls temporarily move backward in parallel, so that the balls can be prevented from colliding with each other on the opening / closing plate 65b. Accordingly, the rolling surface of the opening / closing plate 65b has a shape having a laterally inclined surface like the lower surface portion 163a, and a flow in the left / right direction is formed on the rolling ball. Since it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movement of the sphere is irregular, it is possible to prevent an unexpected malfunction.

  The receiving member 163 is formed with an abutting surface portion 163a3 that abuts the rotating tip at the left and right end portions of the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b, and improves the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b. Yes. The contact surface portion 163a3 is formed as a pair of left and right, and is formed so as to be surface contact instead of point contact by a shape design adapted to the shape of the opening and closing plate 65b, so that the arrangement of the opening and closing plate 65b is easily stabilized. In addition, since stress concentration can be avoided by receiving the load at the time of contact with the surface, durability can be improved.

  Further, an auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is formed below the contact surface portion 163a3. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is formed in a surface shape that is substantially parallel to the opening / closing plate 65b disposed opposite to the opening / closing plate 65b. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe when the contact between the contact surface portion 163a3 and the opening / closing plate 65b becomes defective for some reason.

  In the present embodiment, a fixed member 161 for restricting the flow of the sphere is disposed on the front side of the contact surface portion 163a3, and basically the sphere is configured not to collide with the contact surface portion 163a3. However, for example, if the rotation tip of the opening / closing plate 65b that contacts the contact surface portion 163a3 is missing, there is a possibility that the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state cannot be maintained.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the normal contact between the opening / closing plate 65b and the contact surface portion 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front-rear width portion and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 at the left and right ends of the opening / closing plate 65b. Is made so as to maintain the stability of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b. Thereby, the reproducibility of arrangement | positioning of the opening-and-closing plate 65b in a closed state can be improved.

  Note that the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening / closing plate 65b in a state where the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since the contact surface portion 163a3 is in contact with the opening / closing plate 65b from a normal state, there is a disadvantage that the load is likely to be accumulated. However, since the area for distributing the load can be increased, the opening / closing plate 65b It is possible to reduce the size of a local load received by the contact surface portion 163a3 by the contact.

  When the opening / closing plate 65b operates from the open state to the closed state, the game ball being received by the opening / closing plate 65b can be received in such a manner that the game ball is pushed into the opening / closing plate 65b according to the shape of the previous design member 141. .

  That is, the ball is in contact with the lower shape of the front design member 141 in an accepting state (for example, a state in which the ball slides between the opening front end of the opening / closing plate 65b and the opening frame portion of the specific winning opening 65a). When in contact, it can flow down to the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by guiding the curved shape. Accordingly, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a sphere deviated from the opening / closing plate 65b falls on the front side of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, it is easy to secure a view to the third flow path component 336. can do.

  In the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the landing of the sphere on the opening / closing plate 65b does not occur. Therefore, the arrangement of the balls flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b It is limited to.

  Therefore, according to the structure of this embodiment, the arrangement | positioning of the ball | bowl which flows down without being guided to the specific prize opening 65a in the closed state of the opening-and-closing plate 65b can be limited to a left-right outer position rather than the electrically-powered object 140a. Thereby, the visual field in the left-right inner side position can be ensured below the left and right end portions of the electric combination 140a below the electric combination 140a.

  Next, the configuration on the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a (the side on which the ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a flows) will be described. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. 7 and 8 illustrate a state in which the components other than the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65 are removed from the components disposed on the base plate 60.

  As shown in FIG. 8, at the rear position of the variable winning device 65 on the back side of the base plate 60, a ball that has entered the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the general winning port 63 (see FIG. 2). A collecting rod 150 is formed in which a path for flowing the water to a ball discharge path (not shown) is formed.

  The collecting rod 150 includes a groove-shaped portion that forms a flow path, and a front side portion that faces the base plate 60 is opened in the groove-shaped portion. By closing the open portion with the base plate 60, a path for flowing the ball to the ball discharge path is completed.

  The collective bowl 150 includes a first flow path portion 151 that forms a flow path of a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 and a second flow path section 152 that forms a path of the ball that has entered the second winning opening 140. And a plurality of third flow path portions 153 that form the flow paths of the balls that have entered the general winning openings 63 arranged on the left and right sides, respectively.

  The first flow path portion 151 is configured as a flow path that tilts in the lower left direction from the rear position of the first winning port 64, and the second flow path portion 152 is tilted in the lower right direction from the rear position of the second winning port 140. It is configured as a flow path. The third flow path portion 153 is configured as a flow path that extends downward from the general winning opening 63.

  Accordingly, in the front view, the flow of the balls that have entered the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is the configuration in which the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 are arranged at the left and right center positions of the game area. , It is brought to the left and right outside from the center position on the left and right by the collecting rod 150. Thereby, a space can be provided below the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 described later can be arranged using this space.

  FIG. 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collective basket 150, and the sorting device 300. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collective kit 150, and the sorting device 300. FIG. 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is illustrated, the other portions are not illustrated, and other components assembled to the base plate 60 are not illustrated. The ground of the base plate 60 is visible. Further, in FIG. 9, for convenience of explanation, the center frame 86 is illustrated in a state assembled to the base plate 60.

  The fixing of the variable winning device 65, the collective basket 150, and the distribution device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like. The collective bowl 150 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  In the distribution device 300, the insertion hole 311 is fastened and fixed to the variable winning device 65 at the upper portion, and the insertion holes 331 are fastened and fixed to the collecting rod 150 at the left and right portions. That is, unlike the variable winning device 65 and the collective basket 150 that are directly fixed to the base plate 60, the presence or absence of the distribution device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

  In other words, the variable winning device 65 and the collective basket 150 in the present embodiment can be used as they are, when the distribution device 300 is provided and when the distribution device 300 is not provided. This makes it possible to share the variable winning device 65 and the collective kit 150 with or without the distribution device 300.

  Next, details of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive a ball from the game area through the specific winning port 65a, and the distribution device 300 constitutes a flow down path through which the ball received by the variable winning device 65 flows. In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player changes based on the detection result of the sphere flowing through the flow down path of the sorting apparatus 300, which will be described in detail later.

  FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 that is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like, and a fixed member that is disposed on the front side of the fixed member 161. A front design member 162 that is fastened and fixed to 161, and a receiving member 163 that is disposed on the back side of the fixed member 161, is fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161, and can receive a ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a. And an interposing member 164 disposed on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163, and interposed as a connecting portion with the sorting apparatus 300, and disposed on the back side of the receiving member 163, and receiving member 163. And a state switching device 165 configured to be able to switch the open / closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b depending on the presence / absence of energization.

  The fixed member 161 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and the shape of the front side is formed as a flat surface except for the screw insertion through hole, the fastening position with the front design member 162, and the specific winning opening 65a. . On the other hand, the shape of the fixed member 161 on the back side is a three-dimensional shape that protrudes to the back side inside the thin portion that is in contact with the base plate 60 at the outer peripheral portion.

  In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin wall portion is formed in a frame shape that is substantially horizontally long, and a through-hole having a size that allows the boundary portion 161a to be disposed is formed through the base plate 60. That is, the boundary portion 161 a is a portion that is inserted through the through hole of the base plate 60.

  On the inner side of the boundary portion 161a, a specific winning port 65a and a horizontally long plate shape extending rearward in a horizontal plate shape parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning port 65a slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning port 65a. And an extended support plate 161b configured to have a pair of left and right substantially T-shaped portions including a vertically long plate-like portion extending downward in the middle of the portion and the horizontally long plate-like portion.

  The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the range behind the specific winning opening 65a and the flow path of the sorting device 300 described later. A protruding support portion 161c protruding from the horizontally long plate-like portion of the extended support plate 161b, a protruding support portion 161d protruding from the vertically long plate-like portion of the extending support plate 161b, and the lower edge of the boundary portion 161a The projecting support portion 161e that projects from the top surface of the unit has a function as a portion that supports the sorting device 300, and will be described in detail later.

  Inside the boundary portion 161a, a symmetrical projecting portion 161f projecting in a bilaterally symmetrical shape below the left and right center position of the specific winning opening 65a abuts on a sphere flowing down the sorting device 300 and guides the flow of the sphere. It has a function.

  A plurality of through holes 161g for inserting fastening screws that are screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged inside and outside the boundary portion 161a. A plurality of fastened portions 161h having a female screw portion for screwing a fastening screw inserted through the receiving member 163 are disposed inside the boundary portion 161a.

  A fastened portion 161i having a female screw portion for screwing a fastening screw inserted through the interposition member 164 is disposed outside the boundary portion 161a at the cut (left and right center position) of the boundary portion 161a. That is, of the through holes formed in the base plate 60, a connecting portion between the through hole for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for inserting the second winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 9). ), The fastened portion 161i is disposed.

  The front design member 162 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape so that the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is uniform. In the range of the back side of the front design member 162 and the front side of the fixed member 161, the sphere can flow down.

  On the back side of the pre-design member 162, a plurality of female screw portions are provided at positions that are aligned with the through holes 161g of the fixed member 161, and are formed so that fastening screws inserted through the through holes 161g can be screwed therein. A fastened portion 162a and a plurality of extending portions 162b and 162c that extend to the back side in a shape that covers the fastened portion 162a from above.

  The extended portions 162b and 162c can prevent the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the pre-design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened portion 162a, so that the durability of the fastened portion 162a can be improved. Can be improved.

  Furthermore, the flow path of the sphere can be restricted by forming the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162b and 162c as inclined surfaces. That is, the upper surface of the extended portion 162b (two locations on the left and right center sides) extending in the vicinity of the left and right edge portions of the specific winning opening 65a is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the left and right sides, thereby extending the extension. It is possible to suppress the sphere riding on the portion 162b from flowing toward the specific winning a prize opening 65a. In other words, the ball riding on the extended portion 162b falls downward on the left and right outer sides of the extended portion 162b and then flows down toward the out port 71 along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2).

  In addition, the upper surface of the extended portion 162c (two places on the left and right ends) extending at both the left and right ends is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the left and right inner sides, so that the ball flowing on the extended portion 162c The flow-down path can be combined with the flow-down path of the sphere riding on the extending portion 162b. This makes it possible to narrow the range in which the falling spheres are arranged (the arrangement density of the spheres can be increased) compared to the number of flowing spheres, and the portion where the visibility is not hindered by the sphere (the downflow path is Space that is not configured) can be secured.

  In addition, although the front design member 162 illustrated in FIG. 11 is described as plain and has good visibility on the back side, it is not necessary to configure the front design member 162 as a plain. For example, a sticker with a pattern or character illustrated may be pasted on the front side of the front design member 162 to decorate it, or a groove is dug in the front design member 162 with a geometric pattern, and light is irradiated to the groove. By doing so, the geometric pattern may emerge and be visually recognized. Further, it may be configured such that the pre-design member 162 is impermeable after the plain or decoration as described above is added.

  The receiving member 163 is formed in a horizontally long frame shape (or box shape) whose front side is opened from a light-transmitting resin material. The guide plate portion 163a2, the contact surface portion 163a3, the auxiliary contact surface 163a4, and the like described above. The inner surface of the frame forms a lower surface portion 163a, a ball passage hole 163b arranged as a through-hole through which a sphere flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, and a position that fits the fastened portion 161h of the fixed member 161 A plurality of insertion holes 163c through which fastening screws which are arranged and fastened to the fastened portion 161h are inserted from the back side, and female screw portions into which fastening screws inserted through the interposition member 164 are screwed, A pair of fastened portions 163d disposed on the side, and a plurality of fastened portions 163e having female screw portions into which fastening screws inserted through the state switching device 165 are screwed.

  The lower surface portion 163a is formed as a left and right inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the left and right outer sides with the left and right central portions as apexes, and is an inclined flow that is inclined downward toward the rear at a position one step down from the left and right outer ends of the left and right inclined surfaces. By providing the lower surface 163a1, the sphere flowing down the rear end portion of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is disposed so as to pass through the ball passage hole 163b with a small resistance.

  The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 that is engaged with the back side of the receiving member 163. That is, the detection sensor SE1 detects that a sphere has passed through the sphere passage hole 163b.

  The interposition member 164 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and has a main body portion 164a having a light refracting surface that inclines downward toward the rear, and is formed through the upper portion of the main body portion 164a to be fastened to the receiving member 163. A pair of insertion holes 164b through which a fastening screw to be screwed into 163d can be inserted; a light emitting substrate 164c arranged above the insertion hole 164b and provided with LEDs; and both left and right ends on the lower end side of the main body 164a A pair of fastened portions 164d formed with a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted through the distribution device 300 can be screwed, and a fastened portion of the fixed member 161 formed through the upper portion of the main body portion 164a. An insertion hole 164e through which a fastening screw threaded into the portion 161i can be inserted.

  The light-emitting board 164c is disposed in a posture in which the surface on which the LEDs are arranged faces obliquely forward and upward. In the assembled state, the position directly above the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 6) when viewed from the front, and the second prize Arranged just below the mouth 140. With this arrangement, the light from the light emitting board 164c easily enters the player's field of view when he / she wants to enter the second winning port 140 or the specific winning port 65a and looks at the spot with a line of sight diagonally downward.

  Accordingly, by controlling to turn on the LED of the light emitting board 164c when a ball entering the second winning port 140 or the specific winning port 65a is detected, a ball entering the second winning port 140 or the specific winning port 65a is controlled. It is possible for the player to easily grasp whether or not the occurrence has occurred.

  From the above-described configuration, the interposed member 164 is fastened and fixed to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. As a result, the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 can be firmly fixed as compared with the case where the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened and fixed. In addition, since the arrangement of the sorting device 300 that is connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the interposition member 164 can be stabilized, the fixed member 161, the receiving member 163, and the sorting device 300 can be stabilized. A relative positional shift can be suppressed.

  The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion portions 165a through which fastening screws to be screwed into the fastening portions 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, and has a plurality of openings for wiring and heat dissipation. A lower case portion 165b formed in a deep bottom box shape whose upper side is open, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c accommodated in the lower case portion 165b, and a plunger engaged with the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c together with the plunger A slide part 165d that slides and a rotation tip that is pivotally supported by the lower case part 165b in such a manner that the pivoting tip part protrudes from the front end part of the lower case part 165b, and rotates as the slide part 165d slides. A moving part 165e and an upper lid part 165g fastened and fixed to the lower case part 165b by fastening screws inserted through the plurality of insertion holes 165f are provided.

  The rotation tip of the rotation part 165e is recessed so that the bar-shaped part can be engaged, and the transmission protrusion 65c protruding rightward from the right end of the opening / closing plate 65b enters the recess. Engaged. The transmission protrusion 65c is disposed at a position that is eccentric from the metal shaft bar portion 65d that forms the rotation axis of the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b. With this configuration, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b can be caused in accordance with the rotation of the rotating portion 165e.

  13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting apparatus 300. FIG. FIG. 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting apparatus 300 as viewed from above, and FIG. 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting apparatus 300 as seen from below.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the sorting apparatus 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 through which a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 164 d of the interposed member 164 is inserted. An intermediate member 330 having a pair of insertion holes 331 that are fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the vertical direction and are formed so as to be able to pass through the fastening screws that are screwed into the female screw portions of the collecting rod 150; The substrate 350 accommodated between the member 330 and the upper member 310 and provided with a light emitting means 351 such as an LED on the front side, and accommodated at a position between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310, depending on the presence or absence of energization A state switching device 360 configured to be switchable, and a slide that is disposed below the middle member 330 and slides back and forth between the front position and the rear position in accordance with the switching of the state of the state switching device 360. The slide member 370 is disposed below the intermediate member 330 so that the slide member 370 is sandwiched between the displacement member 370 and the intermediate member 330, and a fastening screw screwed into the female screw portion of the collecting rod 150 is inserted therethrough. A lower member 380 having an insertion hole 381 to be formed.

  Before describing details of the configuration of each unit, an overview of the functions of the sorting apparatus 300 will be described. The sorting device 300 is a device that constitutes a flow path through which a sphere that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flows down.

  The spheres that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b flow down in the order of the inside of the upper member 310, the flow path components 334, 335, and 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the inside of the lower member 380. Then, the sphere flowing down from the lower member 380 is discharged to a ball discharge path (not shown).

  The ball flowing down inside the sorting apparatus 300 is configured to be visible to the player, and the flow down mode provides not only a mere staging effect to entertain the player's eyes but also the player. There is an effect related to the game profit such as a change in profit.

  The difference in the flow mode of the sphere flowing down inside the sorting apparatus 300 is mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, depending on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 when the sphere flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380, a difference occurs in which part of the lower member 380 the sphere passes.

  Accordingly, the player's line of sight is likely to gather at a place where the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 (placement position of the slide displacement member 370 as will be described later). Ingenuity has been made on the premise of concentration.

  Next, details of the configuration of each part of the sorting apparatus 300 will be described. The upper member 310 is a thin U-shaped thin member formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the insertion hole 311 described above, a pair of openings 312 formed so as to be able to receive a sphere, and a mark. A pair of colored (red in the present embodiment) transparent sealing member 313, a pair of upper surface portions 314 extending from the lower edge of the opening 312 to the front side along the outer periphery, and a middle member A plurality of insertion tube portions 315 in which through holes through which fastening screws to be screwed into 330 are inserted, and fastened portions 316 having female screws into which the fastening screws inserted into the middle member 330 can be screwed, A pair of longitudinally projecting portions 317 that are long in the front-rear direction and are arranged side by side and projecting downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310, and downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310 It is a part that is elongated in the left-right direction A pair of left and right inner projecting portions 318 disposed between the pair of front and rear long projecting portions 317, and a left and right long portion projecting downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310. A pair of left and right outer projecting portions 319 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the pair of front and rear long projecting portions 317, and a housing recess 320 formed as a recess having a size capable of arranging the upper portion of the substrate 350 are provided.

  The opening 312 is a passage-shaped portion (tunnel-shaped portion) that receives a ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and flows downward, and the upper front edge portion is a detection sensor SE1 (inclined posture). The shape is such that it is cut by an inclined surface so as to be flush with the back surface of the plate in FIG. Thereby, the upper front edge part of the opening part 312 can be made to contact the board back surface of detection sensor SE1.

  Further, the opening 312 is formed with an opening degree that does not enter the inside of the opening of the sphere passage hole 163b when viewed in the opening direction of the sphere passage hole 163b. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the flow resistance when guiding the sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 163b to the opening 312.

  The seal member 313 functions as a member that attracts the player's attention by receiving light emitted from the light emitting unit 351 of the substrate 350 and being visually recognized, and details thereof will be described later.

  The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is inclined according to the flow path of the sphere below the upper member 310. The first upper surface portion 314a disposed on the front side of the opening 312 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side, and is connected to the front end portion of the first upper surface portion 314a and disposed on the left and right inner sides. 314b is formed so as to incline downward toward the left and right inner sides. Further, by configuring the left-right distance between the left and right second upper surface portions 314b to be longer toward the near side, it is possible to secure the field of view of the player who visually recognizes the ball through the second upper surface portion 314b.

  The insertion tube portion 315 has a counterbore for receiving the screw head of the fastening screw formed on the upper surface side. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the player from visually recognizing the screw head of the fastening screw while the fastening screw is inserted from above.

  The insertion tube portion 315 is disposed at a position that fits the fastened portion 332 d having a female screw portion formed in the intermediate member 330. In particular, the fastened portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion tube portion 315 also serves as a support portion that supports the rotating portion 363, and details will be described later.

  The fastening screw to be screwed into the fastened portion 316 is arranged with the screw portion facing upward and the screw head facing downward. Therefore, the screw head is made inconspicuous with respect to the player who sees from diagonally above, although the to-be-fastened part 316 is arrange | positioned at this side. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the appearance of the sorting apparatus 300 from being deteriorated by the fastening screw, while fixing the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 with strength.

  The part to be fastened 316 is formed only on the right side because the insertion tube part 315 has already been arranged at two positions on the rear side, so that the fastening position on the front side is sufficient at one place, and the screw head faces downward The reason is that the appearance of the sorting apparatus 300 is improved by omitting the arrangement if it is unnecessary, although it is difficult to notice. In addition, arrangement | positioning of the to-be-fastened part 316 is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged on the left side or a pair of left and right sides.

  The arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is set as a position that avoids the flow path of the sphere and minimizes the deterioration of the appearance of the sorting apparatus 300, and will be described in detail later.

  The lower surface portions of the front and rear long projecting portions 317, the left and right inner projecting portions 318, and the left and right outer projecting portions 319 formed by each pair are curved so that the arrangement decreases with increasing distance from the same location. Formed as a surface. The curved surface has different shapes for the front and rear long projecting portion 317, the left and right inner projecting portion 318, and the left and right outer projecting portion 319, and there is an intention to control the flow-down mode of the sphere by this difference in shape.

  The middle member 330 includes the pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (substantially box shape) having a lower bottom portion on the rear side, and a frame shape (substantially lower) on the front side. A pair of front side frame-shaped parts 333 formed in a box shape, a pair of first flow path constituting parts 334 that are recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front side frame-like part 333 and constitute a flow path of the sphere, and the first A pair of second flow path components 335 that are connected to the front end of the flow path component 334 to form a flow path of a sphere and are recessed on the front side of the front frame-shaped portion 333, and the second flow path component And a pair of third flow path components 336 that are connected to the left and right inner ends of 335 to form a flow path of the sphere and are recessed in the left and right inner sides of the front frame-shaped portion 333.

  Further, the middle member 330 includes a discharge hole 337 that functions as a discharge path for a sphere that is formed in a left and right elongated shape and is formed in the lower base on the rear side of the rear end portion of the third flow path component 336, and the discharge hole 337 and A partition plate portion 338 formed in a plate shape elongated in the front-rear direction so as to partition the third flow path component 336 into the left and right, and a rectangular shape that is elongated from the lower side at the rear end of the third flow path component 336. A pair of alignment projecting portions 339 projecting as shape convex portions.

  Unlike the front side part constituting the sphere flow path, the rear frame-shaped part 332 does not form a sphere flow path, and is mainly configured as a part that supports the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame-shaped portion 332 is formed as a through hole 332a for placement in the vertical direction at the front side end of the left and right central portion and configured to allow the slide displacement member 370 to be placed, and as a through hole elongated in the left and right direction A plurality of guide holes 332b that are formed through the lower bottom portion and guide the slide displacement of the guided portion 362c of the state switching device 360, and a female screw portion that is formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the lower member 380 can be screwed therein. A fastened portion 332c, and a cylindrical fastened portion 332d having an upper threaded female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted through the insertion tube portion 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed.

  The front frame-shaped portion 333 is subjected to light diffusion processing on the inner side of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom portion, so that the visibility on the back side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 is lowered. The front frame portion 333 is formed in a substantially square frame shape when viewed from above, and an insertion hole 333a formed as a counterbore hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted. Is provided.

  The first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 are portions that constitute the flow path of the sphere, respectively, so that the flow direction of the sphere, the inclination angle, and the like are different. Although designed, details will be described later.

  The opening 335a whose front side is opened at the connection position of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 is allowed to enter the symmetrical projecting portion 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable winning device 65. It is a gap for That is, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is disposed so as to enter the inside of the flow path through the opening portion 335a so as to be able to come into contact with the sphere flowing down the sorting device 300.

  The discharge holes 337 are partitioned by the partition plate portion 338, are configured as a pair of left and right, and are formed in such a size that the sphere can be discharged in at least two paths. That is, it is composed of at least a left and right length that is at least twice the diameter of the sphere. In the present embodiment, since the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side on the lower member 380 disposed below the discharge hole 337, the discharge holes 337 are matched to the arrangement of the ball through holes of the detection sensor SE1. What is necessary is just to design the shape.

  The partition plate portion 338 functions as a guide portion that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in addition to the function of partitioning the third flow path constituting portion 336 as described above, and details thereof will be described later. The alignment projecting portion 339 is a portion for fitting with the projecting portion 383a of the lower member 380 and avoiding misalignment between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, details of which will be described later.

  The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T shape in which the lower side portion 353 is longer in the left and right direction than the upper side portion 352, and a concave portion for alignment is provided at the lower end portion on the left end side of the lower side portion 353. Part 354.

  The recessed portion 354 engages with a corresponding portion as the internal shape of the middle member 330 to perform positioning in the left-right direction, and the left and right long lower portion 353 is front and rear with respect to the rear frame-shaped portion 332 of the middle member 330. It is positioned so as to be sandwiched from the front, and the positioning in the front-rear direction is performed, and the upper portion 352 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310 so that the upper part 352 is prevented from falling off, so that the arrangement is fixed. The details will be described later together with the intention of the arrangement of the light emitting means 351.

  The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361 and a tip of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so as to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction. A sliding portion 362 that is slidably displaced together with the plunger, and a rotating portion 363 that is rotatably supported by being inserted into the left-side fastened portion 332d, and that rotates with the sliding displacement of the sliding portion 362, .

  The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so that the disc portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 can be received from the upper side, an overhang portion 362b that protrudes rightward from the right side surface, and a lower side surface And a guided portion 362c that is formed in a long oval cross section that protrudes downward from the front and rear central portions of the main body.

  Since the disc portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from the upper side in the direction in which the recessed portion 362a is formed, the slide portion 362 can be prevented from falling off. Therefore, the arrangement of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disc portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the middle member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disc portion 361a with an adhesive or the like.

  The guided portion 362 c is a portion for avoiding the displacement direction of the slide portion 362 from deviating from the left-right direction by being inserted through the guide hole 332 b of the intermediate member 330. In particular, in the present embodiment, the slide portion 362 is formed to be long in the left-right direction, so that the posture of the slide portion 362 can be maintained by the engagement between the guided portion 362c and the guide hole 332b. Note that the cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be, for example, a circle or a rectangle.

  The rotating portion 363 is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from above, and is formed in a cylindrical shape that is long in the vertical direction at the L-shaped connecting portion, and penetrates through the fastening portion 332d of the intermediate member 330. A support cylinder portion 363a having a hole, an upper cylindrical portion 363b projecting in a columnar shape upward from the distal end portion of the L-shape, and inserted into a through-hole included in the overhang portion 362b; A lower cylindrical portion 363c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the side distal end portion and is inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370.

  With the above-described configuration, the rotation portion 363 is configured to be rotatable about the support cylinder portion 363a as a central axis. The displacement of the rotating portion 363 is caused by a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when the plunger is slid and the slide part 362 is displaced in the left-right direction by energizing the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the upper cylindrical part 363b inserted through the through hole of the overhang part 362b is displaced. The lower cylindrical portion 363c is displaced, and as a result, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced.

  The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is supported so as to slide and displace in the front-rear direction at a position between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. The lower bottom portion and the lower member of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 are supported. A thin plate portion 371 sandwiched and supported by 380 from above and below, an upper projecting portion 376 projecting upward from the thin plate portion 371 in a pair of left and right sides, and a left and right center on the rear side of the upper projecting portion 376 A recessed portion 378 that is recessed at the projecting end portion of the projecting portion that projects upward at the portion so as to be able to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

  The thin plate portion 371 is elongated in the front-rear direction with a left-right width shorter than the arrangement interval of the upper projecting portion 376 from the front-side end portion in the left-right central portion and a supported hole 371 a formed through a pair of left and right in the rear half. A recessed portion 372 to be recessed, a pair of lower protruding portions 373 protruding downward in a protruding shape along the edge of the recessed portion 372, and a protrusion along the left and right edges in the rear half A plurality of upper and lower ridges 374 that protrude in both the upper and lower directions in a strip shape, and a columnar protrusion 375 that protrudes downward from the rear end in a columnar shape and is inserted into the guide elongated hole 386 of the lower member 380. Prepare.

  The lower ridge portion 373 and the upper and lower ridge portions 374 are portions that are assumed to face and slide against the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 disposed on the upper and lower sides. This is a protrusion for reducing the contact area between the member 330 and the lower member 380. Since the displacement resistance of the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced by reducing the contact area, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the slide displacement member 370 from slowing down.

  The upper projecting portion 376 is a columnar portion having a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed so as to pass through the placement through-hole 332a and enter the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332. The width of the gap between the left and right inner sides of the upper projecting portion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330. With this configuration, the partition plate 338 can guide the displacement of the upper projecting portion 376.

  In other words, the upper projecting portion 376 is arranged so that the partition plate portion 338 is sandwiched between the left and right inner gaps, and is configured such that the displacement in the left-right direction is suppressed by contact with the partition plate portion 338. Thereby, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be favorably guided, and the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

  The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole that is elongated in the left-right direction so as to be able to cope with the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 required to cause the slide displacement member 370 to move in the front-rear direction. The

  The projecting portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed is configured to pass through the placement through-hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332, so that the lower cylinder of the rotating portion 363 is formed. The portion 363c can be easily inserted into the recessed portion 378.

  Thus, the shape of the arrangement through-hole 332a includes the entire range in which the upper projecting portion 376 to be inserted and the projecting portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed are disposed inside. Designed as a through hole.

  The lower member 380 includes the above-described insertion hole 381, a plate-like portion 382 formed in a thin plate shape that is elongated to the left and right, and a plurality of (four in this embodiment) detection sensors below the plate-like portion 382. And a sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape that enables SE1 to be arranged side by side.

  The sensor holding frame portion 389 has a frame shape in which the back side surface into which the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and the upper and lower side surfaces through which a sphere passing through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 passes are formed and the other portions are closed. Formed.

  The plate-like portion 382 has two through-holes formed at the positions matching the through-holes of the detection sensor SE1 in the same manner as the through-holes in the vertical direction are formed in the sensor holding frame portion 389. A ridge portion 383 projecting upward in the longitudinal shape in the longitudinal direction at an intermediate position of SE1, and a pair of projections projecting left and right from the front end of the ridge portion 383 A pair of guide projecting portions 384 projecting at positions that can be inserted into the supported holes 371a of the slide displacement member 370 at positions rearward of the projecting ridge portions 383, and the guide projecting portions 384. A pair of guide protrusions 385 formed as elongated protrusions in the front-rear direction at both the left and right outer positions, and a long guide hole 386 extending in the same straight line as the protrusion 383 in a top view. , Curved surface protruding rearward on the front side Includes a curved surface portion 387 which is formed by Jo, an insertion hole 388 formed through the fastening screw is threaded insertable to the fastened portion 332c of the middle member 330, a.

  The protrusion 383 is formed as a protrusion having a right and left thickness slightly shorter than the left and right gap width of the recess 372 of the slide displacement member 370, and the slide displacement member 370 sandwiches the protrusion 383 with the recess 372. Be placed. That is, the protrusion 383 functions as a guide for guiding the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction.

  The protruding portion 383 a is designed such that the left and right inner ends are at the same position as the left and right outer ends of the alignment protruding portion 339 of the middle member 330. That is, the right and left inner ends of the pair of projecting portions 383a are fitted in such a manner that the left and right outer end portions of the alignment projecting portions 339 come into contact with each other. The position of the direction can be determined appropriately. At the same time, the lower side surface of the lower member 380 (the portion connecting the protruding portion 383 to the protruding portion 383a on the front end side) and the front side surface of the alignment protruding portion 339 are brought into contact with each other, The position in the front-rear direction of the middle member 330 with respect to the member 380 can be appropriately determined.

  Accordingly, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a positional deviation between the third flow path forming unit 336 as the configuration of the middle member 330 and the detection sensor SE1 as the configuration of the lower member 380.

  The guide projecting portion 384 is formed in an elongated oval shape on the left and right, and is inserted into the supported hole 371 a of the slide displacement member 370 to limit the displacement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement within the range in which the guide protruding portion 384 is disposed inside the supported hole 371a.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383 from colliding with each other. For example, the front end of the displacement is determined by the position where the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383 collide. Compared with the configuration, the durability of the protrusion 383 can be improved. Therefore, the guidance effect by the protrusion 383 can be continued for a long time.

  The guide protrusion 384 functions as a part for preventing a collision with the protrusion 383, not a part that immediately affects the operation of the slide displacement member 370 even if it is damaged. Therefore, when the guide protrusion 384 is designed with a strength that can be used for a set period (for example, three years) in a state where the guide protrusion 384 is not damaged, after the guide protrusion 384 is damaged, the protrusion 383 The strength of the guide protrusions 384 and the protrusions 383 may be designed in anticipation of use in a state where the slide displacement member 370 collides. In other words, the life of the guide protrusion 384 may be set to be less than the set period (for example, 2 years), and the remaining period may be designed to withstand the strength of the protrusion 383. In this case, the degree of freedom of setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom of shape can be improved.

  The guide protrusions 385 are arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the left and right widths of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, and are formed so that the thin plate portion 371 can be arranged in the gap. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement on the left and right inner sides of the guide protrusion 385. Thereby, the displacement in the front-rear direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be generated with a small displacement in the left-right direction.

  The guide long hole 386 is a long hole formed with a lateral width through which the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the slide displacement member 370 can be inserted. The direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited in the front-rear direction by the cylindrical protrusion 375 being guided by the guide long hole 386.

  The curved surface portion 387 is a contact surface for guiding the flow of a sphere that flows down below the middle member 330. In this embodiment, the flow of a sphere that has entered the out port 71 is guided, and details will be described later.

  A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 in a posture with the screw head directed downward. Thereby, it can avoid that a fastening screw is visually recognized. Further, the insertion hole 388 is arranged on the left and right outer sides and the back side of the range where the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 388 blocks the field of view of the sphere passing through the detection sensor SE1 or through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

  As described above, the slide displacement member 370 has a plurality of portions, that is, a guide protrusion 385 for the thin plate portion 371, a guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, a recess 372, and a lower protrusion 373. It is guided by the protrusion 383, the guide long hole 386 for the cylindrical protrusion 375, the partition plate 338 for the upper protrusion 376, etc., and is displaced in the front-rear direction. Thereby, since the load at the time of guidance can be shared to a plurality of positions, it can be avoided that the load is applied locally, and the breakage of the slide displacement member 370 and the guide portion for guiding the slide displacement member 370 can be avoided. Can do.

  As can be seen from this, the slide displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by at least a plurality of members of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, in the slide displacement member 370, at least the pair of upper projecting portions 376 are guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed portion 372 is guided by the projecting portion 383 of the lower member 380.

  Therefore, if the assembly of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor and the displacement is large, the movement of the slide displacement member 370 is hindered. Here, the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are preferably configured so that the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is good as a portion that continuously configures the flow path of the sphere, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is good. It can be ensured that the displacement is small.

  In other words, if the displacement of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes excessively large, the slide displacement member 370 is not favorably displaced. Therefore, by detecting that the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is defective. Then, it is possible to perform control so that error notification is executed because there is a possibility that the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is defective.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a state where the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor, so that the possibility that the player suffers an unexpected disadvantage can be reduced.

  Next, details of the internal structure of the sorting apparatus 300 will be described. Here, the configuration related to the flow of the sphere inside the sorting apparatus 300 and the configuration that enters the flow path side of the sphere will be mainly described.

  15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting apparatus 300. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting apparatus 300 along the line XVI-XVI of FIG. 15, and FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the allocating device 300 along line XVII-XVII, and FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the allocating device 300 along line XVIII-XVIII in FIG.

  15 to 18, in the illustrated case, the opening / closing plate 65b is illustrated in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is illustrated in a state of being disposed at a front side position. First, the details of the flow path of the sphere flowing down inside the sorting apparatus 300 will be described.

  When the opening / closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6B), the ball that has landed on the opening / closing plate 65b rolls on the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b. The sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 163 b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path component 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path component 334, the subsequent second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 that follows the first flow path component 334 are all configured as an inclined flow channel that is inclined downward, and the flow channels that are connected to each other Is formed in a spiral shape having an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

  That is, the first flow path component 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the sphere to flow down to the front side in the front-rear direction, and the second flow path component 335 is based on the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the first flow path component 334. The third flow path component 336 is the same as the previous rotation direction with reference to the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335. It is formed as an inclined channel that causes the sphere to flow down to the back side in the front-rear direction rotated 90 degrees in the direction.

  Thus, by forming the flow path in a spiral shape with a right angle of bending, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the flow speed of the sphere increases toward the downstream side. More specifically, when the sphere flowing down the first flow path component 334 accelerates toward the front side, the flow direction in the subsequent second flow path component 335 has no front-rear direction component. It is possible to realize a flow-down mode in which the influence received from the acceleration by the component 334 is suppressed. Furthermore, in the third flow path component 336 following the second flow path component 335, the flow flows backward in the direction opposite to the acceleration direction in the first flow path component 334. It is possible to realize a flow-down mode that suppresses the influence.

  Therefore, for example, unlike the flow-down mode that flows down in the same direction (for example, in the left direction) from start to finish, it is possible to easily prevent the flow speed of the sphere from becoming excessive on the downstream side. In other words, the flow speed of the ball can be made uniform throughout the entire flow path, the player's attention to the ball can be kept high, and the occurrence of a situation where the player loses sight of the ball can be easily avoided. There is an effect that can be.

  In addition, for example, it is possible not to form the second flow path component 335, but the formation of the second flow path component 335 can easily prevent clogging of the sphere and backflow. When the second flow path component 335 is not formed (when the left and right length of the second flow path component 335 is 0), that is, the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 In the case of connection, it is necessary to reverse the flow direction of the sphere 180 degrees from the flow on the near side to the flow on the rear side at the connection point. In this case, the switching angle of the flow direction of the sphere is large, and it is particularly necessary to reverse the speed direction back and forth, so it is difficult to flow the sphere smoothly, and it is prone to stagnation, clogging and backflow of the sphere. May occur.

  On the other hand, if the switching angle in the flow direction is 90 degrees or less as in this embodiment (90 degrees in this embodiment), the speed direction of the sphere does not reverse, so the sphere flows smoothly. It is possible to easily avoid stagnation, clogging, and backflow of the sphere.

  The shape of the flow path at the connection end of each flow path component 334 to 336 will be described. At the connection end between the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, the above-described symmetrical projecting portion 161f is disposed as a portion for guiding the flow of the sphere in a manner in which the flow direction of the sphere is bent. Is done.

  The symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed such that the portion disposed on the downstream side is retracted from the path of the sphere than the portion disposed on the upstream side of the sphere. For example, the left and right widths of the symmetrical projecting portions 161f arranged opposite to each other are formed longer than the left and right widths of the partition plate portions 338 arranged adjacent to each other. Further, the rear end portions of the left and right end sides of the symmetrical projecting portion 161f arranged opposite to each other are arranged on the front side rather than the flow passage side surface of the second flow passage constituting portion 335 near the open portion 335a (FIG. 17). reference).

  Thereby, when a sphere collides with the symmetrical projecting portion 161f, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being excessively decelerated or causing a backflow of the sphere.

  In addition, at the connection end between the second flow path component 335 and the first flow path component 334, the side wall 334a that is curved at the front left and right ends of the middle member 330 bends the flow direction of the sphere. In a manner, it is formed as a part for guiding the flow of the sphere.

  In addition, the upstream end portion of the first flow path component 334 is projected upward from the flow surface of the first flow path component 334 in a curved surface shape (see FIG. 16) that decreases in arrangement toward the front side. The curved protrusion 334b is formed as a portion that guides the flow of the sphere in a manner that bends the flow direction of the sphere.

  In other words, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b, flows down the first flow path component 334, and contacts the side wall 334a during the flow, so that the flow direction is switched. The flow direction is switched by flowing down the flow path component 335 and abutting the symmetrical projecting portion 161 f during the flow, and flows down the third flow path component 336 and reaches the discharge hole 337.

  The side wall part 334a is engaged with the projecting support part 161d of the fixed member 161 and is formed in a shape that can be aligned. That is, the side wall portion 334a is supported so as to be sandwiched between the left and right projecting support portions 161d, and the displacement in the left and right direction is restricted, so that the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 are aligned in the left and right direction. It can be performed.

  The ratio of the inclination angle and the length in the longitudinal direction of each flow path component 334 to 336 will be described. Regarding the inclination angle in the longitudinal direction, the first flow path component 334 has an inclination angle with respect to the horizontal of approximately 7 degrees, and the second flow path component 335 has an inclination angle with respect to the horizontal of approximately 5 degrees. The flow path component 336 has an inclination angle with respect to the horizontal of about 5 degrees. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path component 334, and the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 are set to a slightly loose common inclination angle.

  Regarding the length, each flow path component 334 to 336 has a front frame-shaped portion 333 formed in a square shape in the top view as an inner side surface, and has the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame-shaped portion 333. A large square having the outer side surface is formed. Here, in this embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the above large square is 45 mm, so that a flow path having a width of 12 mm is formed around it. It is formed.

  Therefore, since the clearance with the flow path is set to 1 mm in total on both sides of the sphere having a diameter of 11 mm that is normally used, the sphere flows down with almost no positional deviation in the width direction. . Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is defined as about 19 mm, it can be said that this is a small clearance. Can be suppressed.

  Of the portions constituting the end portions of the respective flow path constituting portions 334 to 336 arranged on the square surrounding the square front side frame-like portion 333, the upstream end portion of the first flow passage constituting portion 334 is formed. Since only the curved protrusion 334b to be configured is arranged on the inner side (front side) than the apex of the square, the first flow path component 334 is connected to the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336. Shorter than that.

  Speaking from the measured values in the top view, the flow paths formed by the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 have substantially the same length (33 mm at the center of the sphere), and the length is The length of the flow path formed by the first flow path component 334 (22 mm at the center of the sphere) is about 1.5 times.

  It can be explained that the time required for the sphere to pass through each flow path component 334 to 336 is not constant from the ratio of the inclination angle and length in the longitudinal direction of each flow path component 334 to 336 described above. That is, the time for passing through the first flow path component 334 having the maximum inclination angle and the shortest flow path length is the second flow path configuration section 335 having the slant angle relaxed and the path length 1.5 times. And the time for passing through the third flow path component 336 is shorter.

  In the present embodiment, with this configuration, when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, the arrangement moves to the back side, and a part is hidden in the non-transparent resin portion of the detection sensor SE1. Thus, from the state where the visibility of the sphere deteriorates, the sphere can be displaced to the front side early, and the state can be switched to a state close to the player and having high visibility of the sphere. Thereby, it can be made easy to avoid the situation where the player loses sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

  Furthermore, in a state where the visibility of the sphere is high, it is not necessary for the player to quickly move the line of sight toward the sphere by slowing down the velocity of the sphere, and the game burden of the player who is paying attention to the sphere (movement of the eyeball) Eye fatigue).

  When attention is paid to the spheres flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 with high visibility, the spheres flow down along the second flow path component 335 in the left-right direction. Compared to the case, since the amount of displacement of the sphere in the front view is smaller when the sphere flows down in the front-rear direction along the third flow path component 336, the game burden on the player who pays attention to the sphere is reduced. It can be minimized when paying attention to the sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336.

  In other words, since the length and the inclination angle are equal, the time required for the sphere to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow path component 336 Are equivalent, but the amount of displacement of the sphere in the front view is different. As a result, the apparent flow velocity of the sphere (the displacement velocity of the sphere in the front view) flows down the third flow path component 336. The sphere that moves is slower than the sphere that flows down the second flow path component 335.

  The flow path of the sphere changes only at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 where the game burden is minimized and the sphere is easily noticed, and the flow path of the sphere is otherwise changed in each flow path component 334 to 336. In common. Therefore, the player's line of sight is easily concentrated on the rear end portion of the third flow path component 336, and thus the game burden on the player who concentrates the line of sight can be effectively reduced.

  In addition, in this embodiment, an opening 335a is formed on the front side surface of the second flow path component 335 in order to secure the field of view of the player who pays attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336. (Refer to FIG. 17), it can be avoided that the flesh of the second flow path component 335 obstructs the line of sight toward the third flow path component 336.

  Further, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f disposed inside the opening portion 335a is formed only with a portion necessary for contact and guidance with the flowing-down sphere, and the formation of the shape portion on the upper and lower sides is omitted. Is done. In other words, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed as a thin plate-like portion on the top and bottom, and a space is secured on the top and bottom sides thereof (see FIG. 18). Therefore, compared with the case where the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed with a thickness in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that the symmetrical projecting portion 161f may prevent the line of sight toward the rear end portion of the third flow path component 336 from being formed. It can be made low and visibility can be improved.

  Moreover, it is comprised so that the ball | bowl which deviates from the opening-and-closing plate 65b and goes to the out port 71 may gather toward the visual field side centering on the rear-end part of the 3rd flow-path structure part 336 (refer FIG. 5). In particular, in this embodiment, the ball that enters the out port 71 flows down below the third flow path component 336, contacts the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and is discharged downward.

  Therefore, on the premise of a line of sight that visually recognizes the sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336 from the diagonally upper front side, the sphere entering the out port 71 flows down the back side of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, since the sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336 and the sphere entering the out port 71 are covered in front and rear, the rear end portion of the third flow path component 336 is noted. The total number of spheres entering the field of view increases.

  In other words, a ball that enters the specific winning port 65a and flows down the third flow path component 336 or a ball that does not enter the specific winning port 65a and enters the out port 71, Enters the field of view that focuses on the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

  Accordingly, regardless of the ease of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, that is, the nail configuration (so-called gauge quality) implanted in the base plate 60, many of the balls that have been fired (other winning openings 63, The rear end portion of the third flow path constituting portion 336 (the portion where the player's attention is gathered) is disposed at a position where the balls other than the balls entering the balls 64 and 140 are gathered and a position covered in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, the line of sight can be efficiently guided to the rear end portion of the third flow path component 336 by the sphere flowing down.

  As described above, the visibility at the position closer to the front side has been improved, but in this embodiment, the visibility at the position closer to the rear side is excluded from the rear end portion of the third flow path component 336. It is configured to decrease.

  For example, on the inner side surface of the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330, a light diffusion processing surface 333b for generating a light diffusion action in a shape following the prism is formed. In FIG. 17, a portion visually recognizing in a sawtooth shape is a light diffusion processing surface 333 b, which is formed over almost the entire inner periphery of the inner surface and the upper and lower sides.

  When the effect of light diffusion occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions so that the entire surface is seen as if it is shining, so that the surface can be shined brightly, while the line of sight is blocked by the light. The visibility on the back side becomes worse. According to the present embodiment, the visibility deteriorates when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when light is not irradiated, at least as compared with the state where light is irradiated. And visibility can be improved.

  On the other hand, if there is a shielding object with the light, the shadow of the shielding object is visually recognized as a black point, and the position can be easily identified.

  A processed surface similar to the light diffusion processed surface 333b is also formed in other portions. For example, the light diffusion processing surface 319a formed on the back side surface of the left and right outer projecting portions 319, the light diffusion processing surface 332e formed on the back side surface of the front portion of the rear frame portion 332, and the like (FIG. 17). reference).

  Further, the processed surface formed in the same shape is a plate-like portion extending on the back side of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310, and in the assembled state in the front frame-like portion 333 of the middle member 330. Illustrated are the light diffusion processing surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the portion to be covered, the light diffusion processing surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the front side portion of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330, and the like. Is done.

  With these configurations, in this embodiment, light diffusion is performed on the back side, the bottom side, the inner side surface of the vortex, and the upper side surface of the vortex of the flow channel formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow channel components 334 to 336. The processed surface is formed, and the effect of the change of the visibility by light irradiation is aimed at.

  In the state where the light diffusion processing surface is not irradiated with light, the direction is changed from the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction with the player looking at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 from the front side. The sphere can be hidden by the front frame portion 333 so that it is difficult to see immediately.

  Furthermore, let's see the ball after passing through the detection sensor SE1 held by the sensor holding frame portion 389 and looking at the player who sees the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 as viewed from the oblique direction. However, since the line of sight passes through the light diffusion processing surface 340, it is difficult to identify the sphere after falling through the detection sensor SE1 by irradiating the light diffusion processing surface 340 with light. .

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the profit obtained by the player is controlled to change depending on how the ball flows down the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

  Therefore, in order to grasp how the sphere has flowed down from the rear end portion of the third flow path component 336, it is necessary to check the behavior of the sphere at the rear end portion of the third flow path component 336. Further, it is possible to further improve the attention to the rear end portion of the third flow path constituting portion 336.

  On the other hand, when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, it is possible to configure a state where the shadow of the sphere can be easily seen as a black dot. In this way, the visibility of the sphere can be switched between good and bad by switching the presence or absence of light irradiation according to the situation. Further, depending on whether or not the sphere is arranged on the front side of the black point, a situation where the black point is hidden by the sphere and a situation where the black point appears not hidden by the sphere can be configured.

  As described above, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed in the vicinity of the flow path components 334 to 336, but the flow formed by the flow path components 334 to 336 is consistently formed. It is formed on the side surface that does not come into contact with the sphere flowing down the road.

  Accordingly, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be prevented from being scraped by contact with the sphere, so that the shapes of the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are maintained for a long period of time. And the effect of light diffusion can be maintained.

  Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the sphere from coming into contact with the light diffusing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340, thereby preventing the flow of the sphere from being hindered or the sphere from being subjected to deceleration. In addition, by ensuring the visibility inside the flow path, the visibility of the sphere is lowered while the sphere is flowing down the flow path formed by the flow path components 334 to 336. You can avoid that.

  The light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the setting of the size of the prism, it is possible to produce an effect of causing an effect of light diffusion and an effect of decelerating the sphere by collision with the sphere.

  In the front frame-like portion 333 of the middle member 330, the formation of the light diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted from the degree of difficulty in processing at the fastening position with the fastened portion 316, and the visibility remains high without countermeasures. there is a possibility. Therefore, in this embodiment, the visibility is lowered by the fastening screw.

  In other words, by utilizing the fact that the fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is impermeable, it can be used as a blindfold at a place where it is difficult to form the light diffusion processed surface 333b. When the front frame portion 333 is irradiated with light, the light diffusion processing surface 333b shines gorgeously, and the fastening screw reflects light and emits light at the portion where the formation of the light diffusion processing surface 333b is omitted. The visibility of the back side of the front side frame-like part 333 in the line of sight from the front side can be reduced including the part where the formation of the processed surface 333b is omitted.

  The light diffusion processed surface 332e of the intermediate member 330 is formed on the back side of each flow path component 334 to 336. For this purpose, the substrate 350 is disposed on the back side in addition to shining brightly. And generating a function as a blindfold of the state switching device 360. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is disposed on the back side of the substrate 350 (see FIG. 17), the substrate 350 is blinded, and the state switching device 360 can be easily prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

  The substrate 350 is accommodated so as to be supported by the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330, but is arranged with a gap from the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 in the left and right central portions, and slides into the gap. A displacement member 370 is disposed (see FIG. 18). In other words, the substrate 350 is disposed at a position where the slide displacement member 370 is sandwiched between the bottom frame portion 332 and the lower bottom portion.

  Specifically, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower side portion 353 is sandwiched from the front and rear by the rear frame-like portion 332 at the left and right end portions (see FIG. 17). In this support location, the bottom portion of the rear frame-like portion 332 is provided with a thick portion 332f (see FIG. 16). A slide displacement member 370 can be arranged in the gap (see FIG. 18).

  As shown in FIG. 18, the upper portion 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310 and is disposed opposite to the front and rear with the light diffusion processed surface 164 f formed on the interposition member 164.

  Therefore, when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351 disposed on the upper side portion 352, the light diffusion processed surface 164f of the interposing member 164 can be brilliantly illuminated. Further, the back side of the interposing member 164 can be achieved. The visibility of the range can be reduced.

  Here, the light emitting means 351 disposed on the upper portion 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion processing surface 164f. The light diffusion processing surface 164f has a cross-sectional shape portion that follows the prism along the surface. Since it is formed in the entire vertical direction, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as light having a wide vertical width. Therefore, it is possible to make the player look as if light is emitted from above and below the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the field of view from the front side, the light diffusion processing surface 164f is disposed at the center of the left and right sides of the receiving member 163, but even if it is disposed on the back side of the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 hinders the field of view. Therefore, if it is formed at least in the arrangement gap between the pair of detection sensors SE1, sufficient effects can be obtained.

  Note that the lower portion 353 of the substrate 350 is disposed so as to irradiate light toward the seal member 313 and the portion of the substrate 350 that is disposed below and the sphere flows down.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, switching of the flow path of the sphere that has passed through the rear end portion of the third flow path component 336 and its significance will be described. In the description of FIGS. 19 and 20, FIGS. 15 to 18 are referred to as appropriate.

  19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the allocating device 300 along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15, and FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the allocating device 300 along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. FIG. 19 and 20, in the illustrated case, the opening / closing plate 65b is illustrated in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is illustrated in a state of being disposed at a rear side position.

  Here, the left and right four detection sensors SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389, the flow of the sphere to each detection sensor SE1, and the function of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

  The four detection sensors SE1 are two symmetrically arranged, and include a probability variation detection sensor SE11 having a common function and a normal detection sensor SE12. The probability variation detection sensor SE11 is disposed on the inner side in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is disposed on the outer side in the left-right direction.

  The functions of the four detection sensors SE1 are different from those of the detection sensors SE1 disposed behind the opening / closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 disposed behind the opening / closing plate 65b is a ball entry sensor that causes a prize ball to be paid out. That is, when it is detected that a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has entered the detection sensor SE1 behind, a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment, one detection) of prize balls is paid out. It is paid out to the player side by the control device 111 (see FIG. 4).

  On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389 is not a detection sensor that causes award ball to be paid out, but as a detection sensor for changing the gaming state after the end of the big hit game by detecting the incoming ball. Function.

  As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 disposed in the sensor holding frame portion 389 is used for switching the presence / absence of the transition to the probability changing state, but is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor for switching whether or not the next jackpot is acquired.

  When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front position (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is disposed so as to cover the thin plate portion 371 on the upper side of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. The passage of the ball to is prevented. Therefore, the sphere passing through the rear end portion of the third flow path constituting portion 336 is guided to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 so as to be guided by the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member.

  In the upper projecting portion 376, the front side surface 376a facing the sphere is formed in an arc shape with a concave on the flow path side, so that the flowing sphere smoothly flows toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. Can do.

  On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear side position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 is retracted backward from above the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and is moved to the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. The passage of the sphere is allowed.

  That is, the detection sensor SE1 through which the sphere passes corresponds to the arrangement (the front position or the rear position) of the slide displacement member 370. Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 during the big hit game, the game state after the big hit game is controlled to be in the positive change state. In other words, when it is not detected that the ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 but only through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after the big hit game is set to the normal state (or the short time state). ).

  Here, in this embodiment, it was mentioned above that the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot are prepared as the jackpot type. In order to realize this, in this embodiment, different operation patterns are prepared as operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 for each jackpot type.

  In other words, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled so as to operate in an operation pattern so that the ball easily passes through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 when the probability variation is a big hit. Although it is controlled to operate in an operation pattern that hardly passes through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and easily passes through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, details of the control will be described later.

  Thus, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is directly linked to the profits obtained by the player, and the player's attention is naturally attracted to the arrangement. On the other hand, there are not a few fraudulent acts that attempt to switch the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 illegally, and countermeasures against them are regarded as important.

  As a premise, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360 is energized. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is not energized, the plunger and the slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are arranged on the right side by an urging spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is the front surface. By being arranged on the side, the slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the front side position.

  On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and the slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left side by electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the concave portion of the slide displacement member 370). The slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the rear position by displacing the portion inserted into the installation portion 378 to the back side. This is a normal operation mode, in which the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 correspond one-to-one.

  The person who performs the above-mentioned fraudulent action inserts a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the distribution device 300 from the ball payout opening or the gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1), for example, There is a possibility that the thin metal wire is pressed against the slide displacement member 370 and the slide displacement member 370 is pushed inward, and an attempt is made to illegally create a state in which a ball can enter the probability variation detection sensor SE11. is there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the slide displacement member 370 is disposed, the thin plate portion 371 is disposed below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 18). When pressing against the slide displacement member 370 through a thin metal wire against the path forming portion 336, it is difficult to press against the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371, and it is pressed against the upper projecting portion 376. Since the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376 has a curved surface shape that allows the load to escape to the left and right as described above, the load can be released to the left and right outside even if the metal thin wire is pressed against it. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the slide displacement member 370 is illegally displaced to the rear position.

  Further, the path to reach the slide displacement member 370 is not a straight line but is spirally wound, and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 itself is far from the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the back side. Since it is separated (about 10 cm), it is difficult to make the fine metal wire reach the slide displacement member 370 in the first place.

  From these structures, the effect that the design freedom of the structure of the state switching apparatus 360 can be improved is also produced. That is, in the past, in many cases, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is maintained by mechanical contrivance (displacement restriction) of a mechanism that transmits driving force against the above-described fraud. The configuration of the state switching device 360 is limited. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by configuring the slide displacement member 370 to be difficult to be loaded in the first place, the conditions required for the state switching device 360 can be partially omitted, and the design freedom of the state switching device 360 can be reduced. The degree can be increased.

  In addition, when a pressing load is applied to the slide displacement member 370 with a thin metal wire passed through the third flow path component 336, the thin metal wire itself flows down the sphere that is about to flow down the third flow path component 336. Therefore, it is difficult to make the sphere reach the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

  As described above, the profit obtained by the player greatly changes depending on whether the ball passes through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. It is desirable to avoid it.

  In the conventional model, it is normal to configure to restrict the entry to the normal detection sensor SE12 in a state where the entry to the probability change detection sensor SE11 is allowed, but in this embodiment, the probability change detection is performed. No movable member is provided to restrict entry into the normal detection sensor SE12 in a state in which entry into the sensor SE11 is allowed (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and also enters the normal detection sensor SE12. It is the structure which can be made to do.

  Even if configured in this way, when at least one ball passes through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 when 10 balls flow down, the probability variation state after the big hit game is secured. In this embodiment, from such a concept, by omitting the arrangement of the movable member that opens and closes the normal detection sensor SE12, the material cost can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, as a result of not arranging the movable member, there is a good effect that maintenance associated with a failure or malfunction of the movable member becomes unnecessary, and the service life of the pachinko machine can be extended beyond the lifetime of the movable member.

  On the other hand, as a device different from the movable member, as a device for guiding the sphere to the detection sensor SE1 on the appropriate side, the flow path shape and the arrangement of the fixed protruding portions 317, 318, and 319 are provided. And shape are devised. That is, a mechanism that prevents a sphere exceeding the expected amount from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear side position is fixedly disposed inside the flow path (that is, the protrusion). It is intended to be realized by the shape of the installation portions 317, 318, 319). This will be described below.

  First, the idea of the channel shape will be described. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal in the lateral direction toward the center in the left-right direction (partition plate 338 side). (See FIG. 15).

  The inclination angle is set so that the angle and the direction are the same as the inclination in the longitudinal direction of the second flow path component 335, so that the second flow path component 335 changes to the third flow path component 336. It is possible to reduce the splash of the ball when the ball flows in (the jump in the direction away from the partition plate portion 338).

  With this inclination in the short direction, the arrangement of the spheres flowing down the third flow path constituting portion 336 can be brought closer to the partition plate portion 338 side. For this reason, the ball when flowing from the rear end portion of the third flow path constituting portion 336 to the detection sensor SE1 side can be disposed on the side close to the partition plate portion 338, so that the slide displacement member 370 is located at the rear side position. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a situation in which the sphere erroneously passes through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 arranged away from the partition plate portion 338) in the arranged state.

  In addition, regardless of the inclination of the lower bottom surface 336a in the short direction, the flow path constituted by the flow path constituting parts 334 to 336 is formed only by the second flow path constituting part 335 in the left-right direction path. Since the inclination direction is on the left and right center side (partition plate 338 side), the speed in the left and right direction is generated in the left and right directions. This also makes it possible to reduce the possibility of a situation in which the sphere erroneously passes through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 disposed away from the partition plate portion 338).

  Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed projecting portions 317, 318, and 319 will be described. It is the left and right inner projecting portion 318 that the sphere that has flowed down the third flow path constituting portion 336 is first disposed close to the sphere. The left and right inner projecting portions 318 are the smallest projecting portions among the projecting portions 317, 318, and 319, but on the front side of the center of the detection sensor SE 1 and on the slide projecting member 370. Since it is arranged on the more front side, it comes into contact with the ball passing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 without any leakage while sliding on the partition plate 338.

  The projecting front end surface of the left and right inner projecting portion 318 is configured as a curved surface that is concave downward in a front view (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the projecting portion is more left and right than the front end side of the projecting portion. It is formed so as to expand outward and downward, and the front and rear end portions are formed so as to be connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, the sphere passing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and contacting the left and right inner projecting portion 318 receives a load in the direction in which the left and right outward components and the downward component are mixed, and flows down. .

  On the other hand, since the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are formed in a small size, only the load received from the left and right inner projecting portions 318 does not determine whether the flow direction of the sphere is downward or left and right directions, but momentum. Acts as a date. Since the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are arranged on the upstream side of the slide displacement member 370, the above-described momentum occurs regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

  The flow of the sphere after contacting the left and right inner projecting portion 318 will be described separately. In a state where the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front side position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while abutting against the upper projecting portion 376 and the longitudinally long projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 18). And flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side.

  The projecting end portion of the front and rear long projecting portion 317 has the same use as the upper projecting portion 376. That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the flow direction of the sphere, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is substantially the same as the radius of curvature of the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376. As a guide, the upper projecting portion 376 has a curved surface starting from the left and right inner sides and ending at the rear position of the center position of the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 in top view (see FIG. 17). The long projecting portion 317 has a curved surface starting from the ceiling surface of the flow path and having a position close to the end point position (rear end position) of the front side surface 376a at the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 in the left-right direction. (See FIG. 18).

  Here, the upper side surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward to the left and right, and the sphere that is urged to the left and right by contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318 makes use of that momentum. Since it flows down in the left-right direction, the sphere can flow smoothly.

  Further, the left and right outer projecting portions 319 are formed above the sphere flowing down in the left and right direction, and the sphere can be smoothly flowed down by suppressing the ball splash. Since the purpose of the left and right outer projecting portions 319 is not to switch the flow direction of the sphere but to suppress the ball jumping, the shape thereof is significantly different from that of the front and rear long projecting portion 317, and the projecting end portion is a probability variation detection sensor. It is formed as a curved surface having a large radius of curvature formed from above SE11 to above normal detection sensor SE12.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the left and right outer protrusions 319 are disposed on the front side of the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (that is, the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19). When the installation portion 319 and the sphere are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, the center of the sphere is easily disposed on the rear side of the thickness center of the left and right outer projection portion 319. Therefore, when the left and right outer projecting portions 319 and the sphere are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, a load having a backward component can be easily applied to the sphere, so that the sphere flows backward to the front side. Can be prevented.

  From these configurations, it is possible to easily prevent the clogging of the balls or the backflow of the balls from occurring when a plurality of balls flow down.

  In the state where the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear side position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper projecting portion 376 are retracted rearward from the front and rear long projecting portion 317, so that the ball is the front and rear long projecting portion 317. Flows in contact with.

  The front and rear long protruding portion 317 has a protruding end portion (curved surface) whose surface shape is such that the normal passes through the center of the third flow path component 336, and the center of the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. Since the center of thickness is arranged directly behind the position, it is easy to give a load in which the component in the left-right direction is suppressed to the contacted sphere. This load functions as a load that causes the ball to flow obliquely downward in the forward direction since the projecting tip of the longitudinally long projecting portion 317 has a concave curved surface shape (see FIG. 20).

  For this reason, the sphere that did not reach the right side by the momentum from the left and right inner projecting portions 318 receives a load obliquely forward and downward due to the load from the front and rear long projecting portions 317 and flows toward the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

  Here, depending on the location at the time of the collision with the front and rear long projecting portion 317, there is a concern that the ball may bounce back to the front side (a backflow occurs). Since it is urged diagonally downward on the left and right sides by the contact with the installation portion 318, even if the ball bounces back to the front side, the ball is not connected to the rear end of the lower bottom portion of the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 20) or Further, it is possible to easily avoid occurrence of a situation in which the third flow path component 336 is caused to flow backward by colliding with the rear side surface (see FIG. 19) of the front frame portion 333.

  What is unique in the present embodiment is that the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front position and the sphere flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side even when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position and the sphere flows toward the probability variation detection sensor SE11. As in the case, displacement from the left and right inner projecting portions 318 toward the left and right outer sides due to the load occurs in the sphere. This application will be described later.

  The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be slidable at the front position and the rear position, and the slide displacement member is being moved while the ball is flowing down the third flow path component 336 toward the slide displacement member 370. When 370 performs a closing operation (operation from the rear position to the front position), there is a possibility that a forward load is applied to the sphere, and a load in the direction in which the third flow path component 336 flows backward (forward) is applied to the sphere. May be given.

  In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, if the ball is controlled so that the closing operation is completed before reaching the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the slide displacement member 370 in operation can be eliminated, and the ball can flow backward. Can be lowered.

  Further, the front surface of the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 is formed as a curved surface facing the left and right outer sides, or the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are arranged so as to collide with each other without causing a sphere. The effect | action which guides the ball | bowl which reached | attained the rear-end part of the flow-path structure part 336 to the left-right outer side can be produced. Thereby, the backflow of a sphere can be made difficult to occur.

  In addition, the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 (operation from the front position to the rear position) is not an operation in a direction opposite to the sphere but an operation away from the sphere. Even if the operation is performed while riding on the thin plate portion 371, a load that pushes the sphere back to the front side hardly occurs. Therefore, regarding the opening operation, it is considered that the backflow of the sphere does not easily occur even when the control is executed at an arbitrary timing without considering the arrangement of the sphere.

  When the sphere rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the upper surface of the slide displacement member 370 (still before flowing to the left and right outside), the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 suppresses rotation with respect to the sphere. Since the load in the direction (the direction to rotate backward) is applied, the rotation of the sphere can be stopped, and the flow of the sphere can be stopped and easily moved to free fall.

  Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 opens while the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371, it can be easily avoided that the ball is guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the momentum of the rolling up to that time. The sphere can be easily guided to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  A description will be given of how the sorting device 300 looks from the player's perspective in the pachinko machine 10 including the sorting device 300 described above. Below, as an example, the case where the angle of the line of sight with respect to the horizontal direction is different will be described separately.

  21 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the allocating device 300, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the allocating device 300 in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16, and FIG. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16.

  As a premise, a player who operates the pachinko machine 10 can play a game in a favorite posture, except for holding and rotating the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, the game is performed by keeping the head sufficiently away from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a line of sight (see FIG. 22) in the direction of descent about 5 degrees from the horizontal or horizontal. Alternatively, the game may be performed by bringing the head close to the pachinko machine 10 and viewing the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight (see FIG. 23) in a direction that is inclined downward by about 30 degrees from the horizontal. In general, the former can secure a wider field of view, but it is difficult to notice a fine part, while the latter has a narrow field of view, but it is easy to notice a fine part in the field of view.

  FIG. 21 is shown as a reference, and the following description will be made mainly by comparing FIG. 22 and FIG. 21 to 23 show the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b for the sake of convenience.

  In FIG. 21, the light emitting means 351 is illustrated by an imaginary line. In addition, although the light emission means 351 is arrange | positioned left-right symmetrically (refer FIG. 13), only the left half part is shown in figure for easy understanding. Since the function of the light emitting means 351 arranged at the uppermost part is as described above, here, the three light emitting means 351 in the left half arranged at the lower side part 353 will be described.

  First, the upper light emitting means 351 irradiates light toward the seal member 313. As described above, since the seal member 313 is formed to be red and transparent, when light is emitted from the light emitting unit 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. Thereby, a player's attention with respect to the sealing member 313 and its periphery can be improved. Since the seal member 313 is disposed immediately above the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 18), the third flow path component 336 can be noticed.

  Note that the formation of the light diffusion processed surface 332e is omitted on the front side of the upper light emitting means 351 (see FIG. 18). Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the light from the light emitting means 351 being visually recognized as being extended in the vertical direction by the light diffusion processing surface 332e, and to shine the periphery of the seal member 313 in a concentrated manner.

  The light emission control is not limited in any way. For example, during the big hit game, control is performed so that the seal member 313 is irradiated with light in a situation where it is desired to pay attention to the sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336. By doing so, attention can be paid to the seal member 313, and the line of sight can be naturally guided to the rear end portion of the third flow path constituting portion 336 disposed below the seal member 313.

  Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side respectively correspond to the position directly above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12. That is, when the sphere enters the probability change detection sensor SE11, the light emission means 351 controls the light emission means 351 disposed immediately above the probability change detection sensor SE11, while the sphere causes the normal detection sensor SE12 to emit light. When a ball is entered, it is possible to notify the player of the passage location of the ball by controlling the light emitting means 351 disposed at a position directly above the normal detection sensor SE12 to emit light.

  The light emitted from the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed to the light diffusion processed surface. That is, the light emitting means 351 on the left and right center side is disposed opposite to the light diffusion processing surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides is disposed opposite to the light diffusion processing surface 319a (see FIG. 17). ing. The light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 332e are formed over the top and bottom of each part.

  Therefore, the position where the light from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351, but is formed as a range having a vertical spread (as a strip-shaped light extending vertically). Visible). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes, the visibility of light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved.

  The angle of downward inclination (5 degrees) from the horizontal in FIG. 22 is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the external shape of the slide displacement member 370 arrange | positioned at the rear-end part of the 3rd flow-path structure part 336 can be visually recognized. However, since the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to grasp a change due to the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in this field of view.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, in the direction view at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end portion of the third flow path component 336 is narrowed. Thus, the degree of difficulty in confirming the switching of the flow-down mode of the sphere at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 increases. However, in this field of view, it is easy to grasp the displacement of the upper projecting portion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

  In addition, since the through hole 332a for arranging the middle member 330 is formed as an opening having a minimum size enough to allow the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 to pass therethrough, the inside of the rear frame-like portion 332 The state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) arranged on the screen can be hidden so as to be difficult to visually recognize.

  During the actual jackpot game, a plurality of balls are guided to the specific winning opening 65a during the round game, and flow down the flow path components 334 to 336 in order. When a plurality of spheres are simultaneously arranged in each of the flow path constituting units 334 to 336, the line of sight toward the back side sphere may be hindered by the near side sphere.

  For example, when a plurality of spheres are arranged in the third flow path component 336, these spheres are arranged at the same position in FIG. Therefore, the back-side sphere is hidden by the front-side sphere.

  Further, when the sphere flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side, the sphere flows from the rear end portion of the third flow path component 336 to the left and right outward directions. Since the visibility decreases due to the light diffusion processing surface 333b of the front frame-shaped portion 333 after the third flow passage configuration portion 336 is deviated in the left-right direction, the movement of the sphere in the process of deviating from the third flow passage configuration portion 336 in the left-right direction It is preferable to grasp the flow rate from the downstream end position (position of the sphere P1) of the second flow path component 335 to the upstream end position (position of the sphere P2) of the third flow path configuration section 336. If there is a sphere (a sphere slightly deviated from the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction), the sphere in the process of coming off from the rear end of the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction is hidden.

  In other words, the grasp of whether the sphere has flowed to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 is to determine whether or not the flow direction of the sphere has switched to the left and right outside at the rear end of the third flow path component 336. This is possible by visual recognition, and it is only necessary to pay attention to the inside of the third flow path component 336 and the periphery of the right edge. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position of the third flow path component 336 and the second flow path component 335 on the upstream side in the direction of the line of sight, the inner side and the right side of the third flow path component 336 The sphere is configured to flow down along a path including the periphery of the edge (movement from the position of the sphere P1 to the position of the sphere P2). For this reason, depending on the arrangement of the spheres flowing down the upstream side, it may be difficult to grasp whether the sphere has flowed to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

  23, the sphere flowing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and the sphere flowing through the second flow path component 335 are clearly separated by the vertical arrangement, so the upstream side It is easy to avoid the situation where the ball is blindfolded. On the other hand, the area of the sphere that can be visually recognized in the direction is reduced because the vertical width of the flow path that is visually recognized at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is narrow.

  In particular, as described above, the sphere that has passed through the rear end portion of the third flow path component 336 once flows downward diagonally to the right regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, and then heads toward the probability variation detection sensor SE11. The flow path is switched to the flow path toward the normal detection sensor SE12. For this reason, the area of the sphere visually recognized at the switching position is reduced as compared with the case where the sphere flows down as a flow path of the sphere or when the sphere flows in the right direction.

  As another mode of switching, there may be a case where the switching position is arranged on the more upstream side, as in the case where the flow path of the sphere flows right below or switches to the right. For example, when the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are not formed and the sphere heading toward the probability variation detection sensor SE11 flows down directly from the rear end portion of the third flow path component 336, the switching position is at least the third flow path. This is the position behind the center line of the component 336.

  On the other hand, when the switching position is displaced to the right from the rear of the center line of the third flow path component 336 as in the present embodiment, the sphere is below the lower bottom of the third flow path component 336. By falling (falling by the vertical difference between the upper surface of the bottom of the third flow path component 336 and the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), the third flow path component 336 itself has a spherical shape. In addition to the effect of partially concealing, the sphere is displaced to the left and right outside of the range visually recognized through the third flow path component 336, so that a part of the sphere is concealed in the front frame portion 333.

  Accordingly, since the area of the sphere that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 that is visible from the player's perspective is reduced, it is difficult to determine which flow path the sphere has flowed down. Become. Thereby, it is possible to further improve the attention to the sphere flowing down in the vicinity of the rear end portion of the third flow path component 336.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, in a plurality of directional views (see FIGS. 22 and 23) described as directional views for identifying the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the rear end portion of the third flow path constituting unit 336. Both have advantages and disadvantages. Accordingly, even if the sorting device 300 is visually recognized, the player can be adjusted and selected a preferred viewing method instead of requiring the player to play a side-by-side game, and the game mode can be widened. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player gets bored with the game.

  The securing of the player's field of view can be realized by various methods. In the present embodiment, in particular, a gap is formed between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310, so that the third flow path constituting portion is formed. Since it can be set as the state where the roof part of 336 was removed, the 3rd flow-path structure part 336 can be made easy to visually recognize.

  22 and 23, the visibility on the front side of the sorting apparatus 300 will be described. Although not shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the fixed member 161 and the pre-design member 162 (see FIG. 5) are disposed on the front side of the sorting device 300, so that transmission is possible depending on the thickness of the member. As the amount of light to be reduced, the field of view is blocked.

  Since the range in which the field of view is blocked by the pre-design member 162 becomes narrower, the directional view of FIG. 23 can more easily see the sphere flowing down the distribution device 300 than the directional view of FIG. There is sex.

  The fixed member 161 and the previous design member 162 are basically flat as described above, and are configured so that light is not easily refracted (see FIG. 12). Thereby, it can avoid that the visibility of the sorting apparatus 300 deteriorates.

  The portion that cannot be made flat in terms of function is also formed so as to reduce the effect on visibility. For example, the player who views the flow path components 334 to 336 so that the protruding support portions 161c to 161e for positioning and engaging the distribution device 300 do not block the player's line of sight obliquely downward. Are disposed outward (upper rear, left and right outer sides, left and right lower sides).

  Further, for example, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed at the center height of the sphere, and is formed thin with a minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). Thereby, even if the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is arranged between the ball and the player's eyes, it is possible to prevent the entire sphere from being hidden, so that the sphere flowing down the flow path constituting portions 334 to 336. Can be ensured.

  Between the fixed member 161 and the previous design member 162, the sphere deviated from the specific winning opening 65 a flows down toward the out port 71. The influence on the field of view caused by the sphere flowing down toward the out port 71 will be described.

  22 and 23 show an example of the arrangement of spheres that flow down toward the out port 71 when the opening / closing plate 65b is open. While the opening / closing plate 65b is open, the ball that has flowed down from above the opening / closing plate 65b rides on the opening / closing plate 65b and is guided to the specific winning port 65a side. It becomes a sphere deviated to the left and right of 65b. These spheres flow down between the extended portion 162b and the extended portion 162c, are guided by the inner rail 61, and flow down toward the out port 71.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the player's view, the arrangement of the spheres flowing through the inner rail 61 is lower than the respective flow path components 334 to 336. It can be easily avoided that the visibility of the sphere flowing down the components 334 to 336 decreases.

  On the other hand, the flow of the sphere flowing down the inner rail 61 is a mode in which the sphere flowing down the second flow path constituting portion 335 flows toward the central side in the left-right direction of the game area at a gradual angle. As with the sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335, there is an effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the left and right center position of the game area. This effect guides the player's line of sight to the out port 71 and to the third flow path component 336. That is, since the left-right direction positions of the out port 71 and the third flow path component 336 are the same position (right and left center position), the player moves his / her line of sight up and down, so that the out port 71 and the third flow path The line of sight is guided to a state where both of the components 336 are visible.

  Therefore, it is easy for the ball launched into the game area to easily enter the specific winning opening 65a (whether or not there is little wasted ball during the big hit game), or the extended portion 162b and the extended portion are deviated. The effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the third flow path component 336 by the flowing-down sphere regardless of whether the sphere flowing down between 162c frequently occurs (whether the useless ball in the jackpot game frequently occurs). Can be played.

  In other words, when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path forming portion 336 in the state of flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335, and the ball can receive the specific winning opening 65a. When deviating, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path component 336 in the state of flowing down the inner rail 61.

  Normally, the ball going to the out mouth 71 does not cause any action in the game as a waste ball, but in the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, Can be given to the third flow path component 336.

  In the closed state of the open / close plate 65b, the sphere flows through the front side of the open / close plate 65b and passes through the front side of the second flow path component 335, thereby reducing the visibility of the second flow path component 335. There is sex.

  On the other hand, the second winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a are disposed above the left and right central position of the specific winning port 65a, and the third flow path component 336 is disposed below the left and right central position of the specific winning port 65a. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, since the second winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a can prevent the sphere from flowing down, the sphere is prevented from flowing down the front side of the third flow path component 336. can do. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the visibility around the third flow path component 336 and the rear end thereof is lowered due to the sphere flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 65b.

  In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be secured by the formation length of the flow path components 334 to 336, but this is likely to occur as an adverse effect. It tries to avoid an increase in space. That is, as shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, the arrangement interval between the specific prize opening 65 a of the variable prize winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 as an indication of the arrangement of the third flow path component 336 in the player's view. Is formed short.

  In addition, since the slide displacement member 370 is arranged below the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), as shown in FIG. , It is visually recognized that the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so close to the outer shape of the specific winning opening 65a.

  In addition, the flow path of the sphere that enters the specific winning opening 65a configured in the left and right length and passes through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 disposed at both the left and right ends thereof is a symmetrical channel structure. Collected below the left and right central sides of the specific winning opening 65a via the sections 334 to 336. Thereby, the time until the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened compared to the case where the ball flows down in the left-right direction of the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, since the structure required as the flow path of the sphere can be a structure in which the left and right lengths become shorter toward the lower side, it can be easily arranged near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61. it can.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is designed to be disposed close to the out port 71. However, the second prize is not a structure in which a sphere is caused to flow down directly from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path component 335. By adopting a structure in which the sphere is caused to flow backward from the left and right inner ends of the flow path component 335 by the third flow path component 336, the out port 71 is disposed on the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface portion 387. Can be formed at a position directly below the second flow path component 335. This shortens the vertical distance between the specific winning port 65a and the out port 71.

  In this way, in the design of a game area in which the size in the front view is limited to a certain standard by shortening the vertical arrangement width and the left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 in the player's view, Since the vertical width of the range occupied by the winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened, the design freedom of the game area can be improved.

  For example, as in the present embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a can be arranged near the lower end of the game area, so that the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used for a symmetrical game area.

  Next, an example of the flow pattern of the ball after entering the sorting device 300 and an operation pattern of the movable accessory (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) considering the flow of the ball will be described.

  First, as a premise, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 flows down the first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 in order (see FIGS. 16 and 17). The time required for the sphere to pass through each flow path component 334 to 336 can be arbitrarily set, but in the present embodiment, it passes through each flow path component 334 to 336 in about 0.3 seconds. Designed.

  That is, after entering the specific winning opening 65a, 0.3 seconds pass through the first flow path component 334, 0.3 seconds pass through the second flow path component 335, the third flow path It is configured so that it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the configuration unit 336.

  Therefore, even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a immediately after the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, it is arranged at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 for 0.9 seconds. The sphere does not reach the detection sensor SE1. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening / closing plate 65b is in the open state, the sphere cannot pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370. The operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 can be designed without fear of erroneous winning of the ball.

  For this reason, for example, a control for releasing the opening / closing plate for a short time at the start of the round game R in order to prevent an erroneous winning of the V winning sensor, which is commonly found in a pachinko machine equipped with a V probability variation attacker (unnecessary to the operation of the opening / closing plate). Control with naturalness) can be eliminated. Thereby, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate that opens and closes the specific winning opening becomes a natural operation, and it is possible to provide the player with an environment for enjoying the game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the pachinko machine equipped with the V probability variation attacker in the above example, a ball entering immediately after the opening of the V probability variation attacker was likely to cause an erroneous winning, but in the variable prize winning device 65 of this case, as described later, On the contrary, a favorable effect (for example, an effect of concealing the operation of the slide displacement member 370 with a sphere) is produced by the sphere that enters the ball, so that it is possible to eliminate the need for a device that prevents the ball immediately after being opened. .

  The time required for the passage of the sphere can be arbitrarily set according to the length and inclination of each flow path component 334 to 336, the shape of the flow path inner wall, etc. (whether it is smooth or uneven).

  The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 24B schematically shows the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. FIG. 24C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, and a second per-random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored.

  The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is stored. If the value of the first per-random number counter acquired based on the start winning matches with any one of the determination values defined in the first per-random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24B) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to each jackpot type. , And a special symbol lottery opportunity in association with the type of winning prize opening. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, if the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first winning port 64) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0-9”. Is defined in association with jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24B).

  When the jackpot A1 is reached, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in an operation pattern X (details will be described later). Controlled to be displaced.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “10 to 19”, the big hit A2 is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 24B).

  When the jackpot is A2, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in an operation pattern Y (details will be described later). Controlled to be displaced.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20 to 39”, the big hit B1 is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 24B).

  When the jackpot B1 is reached, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with an operation pattern X (details will be described later). Controlled to be displaced.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “40 to 49”, the big hit B2 is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 24B).

  When the jackpot B2 is reached, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in an operation pattern Y (details will be described later). Controlled to be displaced.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 79”, the big hit C1 is associated and defined (see 202b5 in FIG. 24B).

  When the jackpot C1 is reached, a four-round jackpot game is executed with a third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with an operation pattern X (details will be described later). Controlled to be displaced.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”, the big hit C2 is associated and defined (see 202b6 in FIG. 24B).

  When the jackpot C2 is reached, a four-round jackpot game is executed with a third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with an operation pattern Y (details will be described later). Controlled to be displaced.

  As described above, if the big win is made in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first winning port 64), in any case, the 4-round jackpot game is selected. For this reason, it is not possible to expect a large number of prize balls as compared to a case where a big win is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2 described later. On the other hand, the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time compared to the 15-round jackpot game, so that it is possible to start launching a ball for the subsequent jackpot acquisition early.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second winning opening 140) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of “0 to 99”. a is associated and defined (see 202b7 in FIG. 24B).

  When the jackpot is a, 15 rounds of the jackpot game are executed with the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with the operation pattern X (details will be described later). Controlled to be displaced.

  As described above, if the big win is made in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second winning port 140), the bonus game of 15 rounds is selected in any case. Therefore, the player who has won the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery can obtain a larger number of payout prize balls than the player who wins the big symbol in the special symbol 1 lottery. Motivation to perform a game for performing the lottery of 2 (a game in which a ball is launched so as to enter the second winning port 140) can be increased.

  In addition, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed by the operation pattern X, there is little possibility that the disadvantage caused to the player will be large even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured. Therefore, there is a disadvantage that the visibility to the slide displacement member 370 is slightly deteriorated, but there is an advantage that a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is likely to be generated. By setting the operation pattern of the jackpot variable winning device 65 at the third operation pattern, it is possible to reduce the influence of the disadvantages and to highlight only the advantage that the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened. .

  That is, since the possibility that the big hit game in the lottery of the special symbol 2 will be delayed can be reduced, it is possible to realize the big win game that is comfortable for the player (the time efficiency of paying out the winning ball is good).

  Note that the setting of the jackpot type of the special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, as the jackpot type of the special symbol 2, a jackpot type in which the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is controlled by the operation pattern Y may be provided. The jackpot type may be provided at a small rate (for example, about 20%).

  Thereby, since the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370 can be improved, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the jackpot game casually. That is, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370, to make the player feel excited at the timing of the displacement operation, and to enhance the interest of the player.

  As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a when hitting the normal symbol is reached. It is set to be long (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second winning opening 140, the special symbol 2 is easily drawn. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, the probabilistic state of the special symbol that is likely to become a big hit of the special symbol and to become a big hit a (a big hit with a good profit balance) when the big win is repeated. Since it becomes easy, it becomes easy for a player to acquire a lot of prize balls. Thus, the game can be performed while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 24C) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. Specifically, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 24C). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 24C). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired based on the passing of the ball through the normal winning opening 67 and the second per-random number table 202c are referred to, It is determined whether or not. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the variation pattern display mode is defined for each display mode.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram showing changes in time of the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 in the first round and the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 in each jackpot type.

  If the MPU 201 (refer to FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts the control of the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure change display (design change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300, which is performed when a big hit game is awarded, will be described. In the description of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 is referred to as appropriate.

  In the present control example, the driving mode is different only in the first round depending on the type of jackpot, and the second and subsequent rounds are set as a common driving mode. Therefore, the driving mode of the first round for each jackpot type will be described.

  In the case of jackpot A1 or jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to hold the open / close plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. And the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to enter an open state in which a ball can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a. The first open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to execute the opening operation for 0.2 seconds at intervals of 1.0 second, and the opening / closing plate 65b is operated for a long time.

  Note that the first opening time is longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game balls are continuously fired, and a prescribed number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 65b to the closed state to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R is completed.

  The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set in order to limit the number of balls that enter the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a to 1 while the opening / closing plate 65b is opened. This is a setting of an opening time to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a (hereinafter, also referred to as “joining with a continuous ball”), and entering the specific winning opening 65a. It is not intended to limit the number of balls to one. That is, even when the opening time is 0.2 seconds, it is possible that one ball reaches each of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a and enters the specific winning opening 65a at a time.

  In the case of the big hit A1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening / closing plate 65b. In this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position at the same time when the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state. The drive is controlled so as to be displaced to the rear position.

  Therefore, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 19), passes through the front side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 20). .

  At this time, since the number of spheres arranged in each of the left and right flow path components 334 to 336 is limited to one, the visibility is not lowered by other spheres. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

  In the case of the big hit A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening / closing plate 65b. In this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position at the same time when the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state. The drive is controlled so as to be displaced to the rear position, and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced from the rear position to the front position after the elapse of 0.8 seconds.

  As described above, since the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17) is set to about 0.9 seconds, before the sphere reaches the slide displacement member 370. The slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front side position.

  Therefore, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17), passes through the upper side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17). .

  At this time, since the number of spheres arranged in each of the left and right flow path components 334 to 336 is limited to one, the visibility is not lowered by other spheres. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

  The 0.8 second as the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is considered as a time shorter than the time required for the sphere to pass through each flow path component 334 to 336, and the sphere is the third flow path component. It is set from the idea that the time is longer than the time required to reach 336.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the ball passes through the second flow path component 335 and reaches the third flow path component 336 approximately 0.6 seconds after the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. Even when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of 0.2 seconds as the opening time of the opening and closing plate 65b, the slide displacement member after the ball reaches the third flow path component 336. 370 can be displaced.

  Therefore, as long as the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball arranged in the third flow path component 336 regardless of the ball entry timing ( (See FIG. 22). Thereby, it is possible to avoid the conspicuous displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370, and attention to the spheres flowing down the flow path components 334 to 336 as spheres entering the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Can be improved.

  The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, since the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced before the sphere reaches the third flow path component 336, it is unlikely that the sight line is blocked by the sphere, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 Can be made visible to the player.

  However, even in this case, the second flow path component 335 is disposed close to the front plate portion of the fixed member 161 and disposed closer to the player than the slide displacement member 370. Are likely to gather on a sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335. That is, by making the sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335 notice (for example, by displaying “Look at the flowing sphere!” On the third symbol display device 81), the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is changed. Can be easily avoided from being visually recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is configured to be divided at the left and right centers, if the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is on the left and right sides, the ball is generated. By paying attention to the rear of the third flow path component 336 on the non-side, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized without being blocked by the flowing-down sphere (see FIG. 22).

  Thus, in the case of big hits A1 and A2, the number of balls arranged in each of the left and right flow path components 334 to 336 is limited to one, so that attention to the balls is improved. In addition, the player can easily recognize whether the ball passes the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

  In the case of big hit B1 or big hit B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to hold the open / close plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. And the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to enter an open state in which a ball can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a. The first open state is maintained for 1.0 second. In the second operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to execute the 1.0 second opening operation at 1.0 second intervals, and the opening / closing plate 65b is operated for a long time.

  Note that the first opening time is longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game balls are continuously fired, and a prescribed number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 65b to the closed state to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R is completed.

  The opening time of 1.0 second in the second operation pattern is set as a time during which a plurality of balls can enter the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a while the opening / closing plate 65b is opened. It is a setting of an opening time for allowing a plurality of balls to enter the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a in succession (hereinafter also referred to as “joint balls”).

  In this control example, since the ball firing interval is set to 0.6 seconds, the opening / closing plate 65b is opened once in 1.0 seconds even when the ball falling interval is not changed from the time of launch. In the meantime, two balls can enter the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening / closing plate 65b is limited every 1.0 second, before the two spheres pass through the respective flow path components 334 to 336, the next sphere becomes each flow channel component 334. Entering to 336 can be restricted.

  In the case of the big hit B1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. Further, in the case of big hit B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, the ball that has passed through each flow path component 334 to 336 in the case of big hit B1 passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and the ball that has passed through each flow path component 334 to 336 in the case of big hit B2 is the normal detection sensor SE12. Pass through.

  At this time, the appearance of each flow path component 334 to 336 differs depending on whether one or more (or more) spheres are disposed on each of the left and right flow path components 334 to 336. When one sphere is arranged in each of the left and right flow path components 334 to 336, the visibility of the other spheres is not lowered as in the case of big hits A1 and A2. The person can easily visually recognize the situation where the sphere passes the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

  On the other hand, when there are two (or more) spheres arranged in each of the left and right flow path components 334 to 336, the upstream sphere should be arranged on the line of sight of the player who sees the downstream sphere. Therefore, the visibility of the downstream sphere may be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the sphere passes the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the sphere flowing down the flow path components 334 to 336. .

  In the case of big hit C1, big hit C2 or big hit a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the open / close plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to hold the open / close plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. And the first round game R is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to enter the open state in which the ball can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a. The opening / closing plate 65b is operated for a long time with the operating time T1 as a limit.

  In the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 65b to the closed state to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R is completed.

  In the present control example, since the opening / closing plate 65b is kept open during the first round game R, there may be a situation in which a plurality of balls enter the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a as a continuous ball. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening / closing plate 65b is not limited, unlike the second operation pattern, before the two spheres pass through the flow path components 334 to 336, A ball entering the flow path constituting sections 334 to 336 may also occur. Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, the third operation pattern has a higher visibility of the spheres arranged on the downstream side of the flow path components 334 to 336 than the spheres arranged on the upstream side. It is easy for the situation to fall.

  In the case of the big hit C1 or the big hit a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. Further, in the case of the big hit C2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, the ball that has passed through each flow path component 334 to 336 in the case of jackpot C1 or big hit a passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and the ball that has passed through each flow path component 334 to 336 in the case of jackpot C2 is usually Passes the detection sensor SE12.

  As described above, the control mode is such that the opening / closing plate 65b is maintained in the open state regardless of whether the sphere is passed through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Since the time required to reach is managed from the structure, the possibility of malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 due to the ball engagement can be eliminated.

  At this time, the appearance of each flow path component 334 to 336 is different between the case where one sphere is disposed in each of the left and right flow path components 334 to 336 and the case where there are two spheres. When one sphere is arranged in each of the left and right flow path components 334 to 336, the visibility of the other spheres is not lowered as in the case of big hits A1 and A2. The person can easily visually recognize the situation where the sphere passes the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

  On the other hand, when two spheres are arranged in each of the left and right flow path components 334 to 336, the upstream sphere is arranged on the line of sight of the player who sees the downstream sphere. The visibility of the side sphere may be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the sphere passes the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the sphere flowing down the flow path components 334 to 336. .

  In the third operation pattern, there is no restriction on the timing at which the player can enter the specific winning opening 65a in the first round game R. Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, each of the flow path components 334 to 336 The arrangement of the spheres tends to be disordered. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is likely to be lowered.

  On the other hand, the fact that there is no restriction on the timing at which a player can enter the specific winning opening 65a has an effect of allowing the round game R to progress at an early stage. That is, a specified number of balls as a round end condition (elapse of round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls). It is easy to satisfy the winnings early, and it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being delayed.

  In particular, since the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled by the operation pattern X with a probability of 100% for the big win of the special symbol 2, the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 when entering the specific winning opening 65a. Is promised. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the slide displacement member 370 is low in the first place.

  Therefore, even if the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is deliberately allowed, but priority is given to avoiding the extension of the jackpot game, thereby realizing the progress of the jackpot game in a short time. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the player for the jackpot game.

  Regardless of the jackpot type, when the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means electromagnetic solenoid so as to hold the open / close plate 65b in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. 165c is driven and controlled, and the second round game R is started after the first interval time Int1 between rounds has elapsed.

  In the second round, similar to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to the open state to thereby receive the specific winning opening. The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to open 65a, and the opening / closing plate 65b is operated for a long time. From the second round onward, the slide displacement member 370 is always maintained at the front position, so that the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is discharged through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17).

  When the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a prescribed number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the second round, The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening / closing plate 65b to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similar to the second round, the round game R from the third round to the final round (fourth round) is repeated between the round games R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the opening and closing plate 65b Is displaced between the closed state and the open state, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the round game R of the final round is completed, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven so that the timer means holds the open / close plate 65b in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. It is controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  In this control example, the case where the short-opening displacement operation of the opening / closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are executed only in the first round has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be executed in all rounds, or may be executed in rounds other than the first round (for example, the third round, the eighth round, the twelfth round, etc.).

  As described above, according to this control example, depending on the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65b (the first operation pattern to the third operation pattern), the manner in which the balls enter the opening / closing plate 65b is changed, and each flow is changed. The visibility of the detection sensor SE <b> 1 arranged on the downstream side of the path configuration units 334 to 336 and the third flow path configuration unit 336 can be made different. Thereby, the player who pays attention to the passage of the sphere of the detection sensor SE1 arranged on the downstream side of the third flow path constituting unit 336 can be motivated to devise the launch mode of the sphere.

  For example, the decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may occur when a plurality of spheres are simultaneously arranged in the flow path components 334 to 336. Therefore, as necessary (for example, the second operation pattern or Decreasing the visibility of the detection sensor SE <b> 1 can be suppressed by intentionally increasing the launch interval of the spheres (in the jackpot type of the third operation pattern). In the first operation pattern, since the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is restricted, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 regardless of the firing mode.

  On the other hand, if the interval between the balls is increased, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a is extended, so that the round game R may be extended. That is, it is possible to allow the player to select a game method of the round game R in a game mode in which priority is given to the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode in which priority is given to avoiding the extension of the round game R.

  For example, in order to visually recognize the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, a certain period (for example, 1.0 second) is left after the start of the round game R so as to cause the specific winning opening 65a to be entered. Also good. In this case, a situation is avoided where a ball is arranged in the third flow path component 336 at the timing when the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 occurs (when the operation pattern Y is 0.8 seconds after the start of the round game R). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 from being blocked by the sphere.

  On the other hand, if the period until the ball is released is extended, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a is extended, so that the round game R may be extended. That is, it is possible to allow the player to select a game method of the round game R in a game mode in which priority is given to the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode in which priority is given to avoiding the extension of the round game R.

  For example, according to the present embodiment, the respective flow path components 334 to 336 and the slide displacement member 370 are configured to be bilaterally symmetric, and a ball can be entered from the left and right sides through the specific winning opening 65a.

  That is, for example, for the launch mode in which the launch interval of the above-mentioned spheres is expanded and the launch mode in which the period until the launch of the spheres is released, it is maintained in the entrance on the left side. Even if a game is played, the same effect as described above can be achieved.

  Specifically, as a firing mode in which the launch of the ball toward the specific winning opening 65a is divided into right and left, at least the first ball is fired to the right, and the number of balls (for example, the second shot) Can be fired to the left and the remaining balls to the right.

  In this case, attention is not paid to the sphere flowing down the right flow path as each flow path constituting unit 334 to 336, but attention is paid to the sphere flowing down the left flow path, thereby avoiding the blocking of the line of sight by other spheres. On the other hand, it is possible to visually recognize whether the sphere flowing down the left channel passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11. In addition, in this case, since the ball is continuously fired toward the right side portion of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid extending the period until a specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to avoid the round game R from being extended.

  It should be noted that this distinction between the left and right ball launches is not intended to have one ball entering the left channel. In particular, it is sufficient that the number of spheres arranged in each of the left-side flow path components 334 to 336 can be limited to one in about 0.9 seconds until the number of spheres passes through the left-side flow path. In this case, the ball may be divided so that a sphere can arbitrarily enter the left and right channels.

  As a result, when the opening width above the specific winning opening 65a is not long as in the present embodiment (for example, from the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a or the nail arrangement (see FIG. 2), the number of the ball entry paths is small. In the case where the spheres heading to the specific winning opening 65a collide with each other, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where one spills to the left and right outside of the specific winning opening 65a. In FIG. 2, the nail arrangement is left-right asymmetric, but a left-right symmetrical nail arrangement may be used.

  Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is a unit fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the back side.

  FIG. 26 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 500, and FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit 500. In FIG. 27, the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the back case 510 is omitted, and the back side is shown through the opening 511a. In the description of FIGS. 26 and 27, FIG. 2 is referred to as appropriate.

  The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape whose front side is opened from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The back case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511 a at the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

  The back case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front side end of the outer wall 512, and faces the game board 13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate part 513 is provided.

  The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that protrudes toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted to a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. And a plurality of insertion holes 513b that can be inserted through the fastening screws.

  By positioning the positioning convex portion 513a in the fitting concave portion of the base plate 60, the rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60, the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b, and the base plate 60 is screwed. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be fixed integrally, the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be improved.

  In addition, the shape of the positioning convex part 513a is not limited at all, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the fitting concave portion of the base plate 60 (in this embodiment, circular or oval) may be used, and the fitting gap is large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having such a shape (a smaller outer shape) may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting concave portion is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is also a rectangular shape correspondingly.

  The operation unit 500 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed therein. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, a first operation unit 600 disposed on the inner right side of the rear case 510, a second operation unit 700 disposed on the inner lower portion of the rear case 510, And a third operation unit 800 disposed on the inner upper part of the back case 510. In addition, the inner left part of the back case 510 is formed of a substrate having a light emitting means such as an LED and a light-transmitting material disposed so as to cover the substrate from the front side, and is subjected to light diffusion processing throughout. A diffusion decoration board LB1 to be formed is disposed.

  Specifically, the first operation unit 600 is located at the right side of the opening 511a, the second operation unit 700 is located below the opening 511a, and the third operation unit 800 is located behind the opening 511a. It is disposed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the case 510. First, an outline of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

  FIG. 28 to FIG. 35 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of the operation of the operation unit 500. In FIG. 28, each operation unit 600 to 800 in the effect standby state is illustrated, and in FIG. 29, the state in which the first operation unit 600 is changed from the effect standby state of each operation unit 600 to 800 to the overhanging state is illustrated. FIG. 30 illustrates a state in which the second operation unit 700 is changed from the production standby state of each of the operation units 600 to 800 to the overhanging state.

  In FIG. 30, the second operation unit 700 is illustrated in a state where the surface facing the front side of the covering member 787 is different from the second operation unit 700 illustrated in FIG.

  In FIG. 28 to FIG. 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is illustrated by an imaginary line. On the inside, the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side can be seen well, but the base plate 60 is formed of a transparent resin member outside the center frame 86. The field of view is easily blocked by nails, various winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., the through gate 67, etc. (see FIG. 2) disposed on the base plate 60. Therefore, for example, in the state of being arranged outside the center frame 86 as shown in FIG. 28, the visibility of each operation unit 600 to 800 in the front view is likely to be lowered.

  Although the frame shape of the center frame 86 is different from that of the center frame 86 shown in FIG. 2 in terms of matching with the configuration of the operation unit 500, its role is the same. In addition, the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 projects downward on the front side of the third operation unit 800, but it does not curve downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86. On the inner frame side of 86, a circular transparent decorative thin plate is formed so as to cover the third operation unit 800 from the front side. Accordingly, the role of rolling the ball on the upper side of the center frame 86 to the left and right sides is also the same as that shown in FIG. 2, and the actual frame upper part (outer frame upper part) of the center frame 86 is the third operation. The upper side of the unit 800 is disposed so as to straddle left and right.

  FIGS. 31 and 32 illustrate a state in which the third motion unit 800 is changed from the production standby state of each motion unit 600 to 800 to the overhanging state. In FIG. 31, the first decorative member 870 faces the front side, and the individual united state of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated. In FIG. 32, the second decoration member 880 faces the front side, and a series of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated. The combined state is illustrated.

  The displacement that can be switched between the state of FIG. 31 and the state of FIG. 32 occurs in a displacement mode that combines a linear displacement and a rotational displacement, so when executed in the effect standby state of the third motion unit 800, Since the decorative members 870 and 880 collide with each other to cause a problem, the third operation unit 800 is executed in the extended state.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the third motion unit 800 is in an overhanging state (or a state in which the third operation unit 800 is displaced downward enough to avoid a collision of the decorative members 870 and 880 from the production standby state), and the decorative member On the assumption that the displacement of 870, 880 is allowed in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) performs the reverse displacement (switching rotation operation). The details are described later.

  In FIG. 33, the third operation unit 800 in the overhang state and the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state slightly displaced downward from the overhang state are shown. In FIG. 34, the first operation unit is changed from the state of FIG. FIG. 35 shows a state where 600 is displaced to the intermediate effect state. In FIG. 35, the third operation unit 800 is displaced to the effect standby state, and the first operation unit 600 is displaced to the overhanging state. Illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the displacement locus of the third motion unit 800 and the displacement locus of the first motion unit 600 or the displacement locus of the second motion unit 700 partially overlap in front view. Therefore, for example, when the third motion unit 800 is in the overhanging state (see FIG. 31), the first motion unit 600 or the second motion unit 700 may collide if the state changes from the effect standby state.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the stand-by state is controlled so as to be executable on the condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the stand-by state. The first motion unit 600 and the third motion unit 800 are controlled so that the state change of the unit 800 from the performance standby state can be executed on condition that the first motion unit 600 is in the performance standby state. It is possible to avoid overlapping in front view. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 (allowing the front and rear positions to overlap).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the state change of the second operation unit 700 to the extended state is controlled to be executable on condition that the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in the effect standby state, When the third motion unit 800 is in the overhanging state, the second motion unit 700 is placed in front of the other motion units 600 and 800 by changing the arrangement of the second motion unit 700 to the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33). It is possible to avoid overlapping with eyes. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the operation units 600 to 800 (allowing the front and rear positions to overlap).

  In particular, as the visual recognition state of the second operation unit 700, there are a plurality of cases in which the second operation unit 700 is visually recognized in an overhanging state closer to the opening 511a and in which the second operation unit 700 is visually recognized in a state in which it is slightly retracted from the opening 511a. By configuring the state, the function of the second operation unit 700 as a rendering device is improved.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the first operation unit 600 is displaced on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. The second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operation unit 600 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-shaped member 661, and the box-shaped member 661 has a first effect surface 661a that faces diagonally to the left in the effect standby state, and its first effect. A second effect surface 661b formed on the back side of the surface 661a and a third effect surface 661c as a surface adjacent to the first effect surface 661a and the second effect surface 661b are provided. Each effect surface 661a to 661c is optionally decorated with a figure, pattern, character, or the like.

  In the production standby state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged at a position on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 where visibility from the front side is likely to be lowered due to the arrangement of the center frame 86. However, since the first effect surface 661a is inclined to the player side (the posture in which the front surface is inclined 45 degrees toward the arrow L side with respect to the arrow FB), From the inside of the opening of the symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86, the first in the player's view of visually recognizing the second decorative rotating member 660 as viewed obliquely through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81. The visibility of the effect surface 661a can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the extended state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is extended to the front of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player who visually recognizes the inside of the center frame 86 can be prevented. Face up. In this case, since the second decoration rotating member 660 is in a posture with the second effect surface 661b facing directly in front, the visibility of the second effect surface 661b in the player's view looking at the second decoration rotation member 660 is visible. Can be improved.

  As described above, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to be able to switch the effect surfaces 661a to 661c to be visually recognized by the player in accordance with the arrangement, and the visibility of each effect surface 661a to 661c to be visually recognized by the player. For the purpose of improvement, the posture can be switched according to the arrangement.

  In other words, it is designed not only to change the posture in a plane parallel to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) but also to change the angle intended for the relationship with the player's line of sight. That is, as the center side of the center frame 86 is arranged, the player's line of sight is in the front-rear direction and is more likely to face the front, so that the visibility is better when the effect surface is directed in the front direction (arrow F direction). Since the player's line of sight tends to be more inclined as the arrangement is closer to the center frame 86, the visibility can be improved by making the production surface oblique to face the line of sight.

  With the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is displaced in conjunction with it. The overhanging decoration portion 652b is decorated with a figure, a pattern, or the like on the front of the board. In the production standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate production state (see FIG. 34) of the first operation unit 600, the back case 510 is arranged. By being placed in the upper right corner, it is hidden from view by the player.

  On the other hand, the overhanging decorative portion 652b of the center frame 86 is overlapped with the right edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 28). By being arranged inside the frame, it is configured to be visible to the player.

  In this state, the outer right end of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is located on the right side of the right edge of the third symbol display device 81. For this reason, by using the decoration on the front surface of the overhanging decoration portion 652b, it is possible to perform a display effect that makes the player feel as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is enlarged.

  More specifically, the right edge of the region where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized is defined by the first motion unit 600, and the second decorative rotating member is in the effect standby state of the first motion unit 600. The left edge of the first effect surface 661a of 660 substantially coincides with the region right end RE1 of the region where the display of the third symbol display device 81 is visible.

  On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is disposed so as to exceed the region right end RE1 on the right side. Therefore, the display area of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is as if the display area of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is the region right end RE1 by associating or matching the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 with the decoration on the front surface of the overhanging decoration portion 652b. It is possible to make the player visually recognize as if it is expanding beyond. Thereby, an unexpected production can be realized.

  Examples of matching the above display and decoration include, for example, displaying a polka dot pattern on the 3rd symbol display device 81 and making the decoration on the front of the overhanging decoration portion 652b a similar polka dot pattern, A typeface similar to a typeface of a number (for example, a number for notifying whether or not a lottery is displayed) displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81, and a number is written on the front surface of the overhanging decorative portion 652b. An example of doing so is illustrated.

  As an example of associating the above-described display with decoration, for example, six colors out of the seven colors constituting the rainbow color are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the front surface of the overhanging decoration portion 652b remains. An example of being colored with one color, or a wooden stick arranged so that the right end of the region is aligned with the right end RE1 of the region is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and a flame is imitated on the front surface of the overhanging decorative portion 652b. An example in which ignition is associated with the first operating unit 600 in the overhanging state by performing the decoration is illustrated.

  Note that the overhang decoration portion 652b is not limited to a single type of production, and a plurality of types of production modes can be configured by controlling the brightness of the overhang decoration portion 652b. The light emitting means for changing the brightness of the portion 652b will be described later.

  Further, by disposing a small liquid crystal device having a display surface on the front side instead of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in a plurality of types, so that it exceeds the region right end RE1. It is possible to avoid limiting the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the display area is enlarged.

  Moreover, the object related to the decoration of the overhanging decoration part 652b is not limited to the display, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decoration portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on the member (for example, the covering member 787) of the second operation unit 700. , Decorations of the overhanging decoration part 652b and decorations (decoration of the first covering part 875, second decoration) formed on the members of the third operation unit 800 (for example, the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880). The decoration of the installation portion 885) may be related.

  FIG. 36 is a front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600. The first operation unit 600 is configured in a complicated displacement manner in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its posture, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotating member 650 is also the second decorative rotating member 660. By making relative displacement with respect to, the player can visually recognize different appearances before and after the displacement.

  FIG. 38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the first operation unit 600 includes a fixed means 610 fastened and fixed to the back case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed means 610, A drive transmission device 630 for transmitting a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620; a supported member 640 whose one end is rotatably supported by the rotating tip of the rotating member 620; A first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably disposed at the other end of the supported member 640, a second decorative rotating member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotating member 650, And a decorative fixing member 670 fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixed means 610.

  The fixed means 610 includes a base member 611 that forms a space between the base member 611 that is disposed to face the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 in the front-rear direction and the base member 611 that is disposed on the front side of the base member 611. And a front lid member 612 that is fastened and fixed to.

  The front lid member 612 includes a transmission arrangement portion 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decoration fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613, and a fixing portion thereof. A support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 inside the portion 614, and a guide slot 616 formed as a slot that guides the other end of the supported member 640. Prepare.

  The guide slot 616 is formed from a unique shape in which a straight portion and a curved portion are mixed, and details and actions thereof will be described later.

  The rotating member 620 is fitted on and supported by a main body portion 621 formed in a long plate shape, and a support fastening portion 615 of the fixing means 610 provided at one end portion (lower end portion) of the main body portion 621. The cylindrical portion 622, a transmission long hole 623 formed in the middle portion of the main body 621 as a long hole extending in the linear direction, and the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 622 at the other end (upper end) of the main body 621. A circular through hole 624 drilled as a circular hole in the drilling direction parallel to the gear, and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in a gear tooth shape along a part of a circle around the circular through hole 624. Prepare.

  A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the cylindrical portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured such that one arm is in contact with the side wall of the main body 621 and the other arm is in contact with the protruding piece of the front lid member 612, and the direction in which the rotating member 620 is raised (front). The biasing force is generated in the clockwise direction).

  In addition, in the axial support of the cylindrical portion 622, a fastening screw is screwed into a female screw portion formed at the distal end portion of the support fastening portion 615 with the support fastening portion 615 inserted through the cylindrical portion 622. The Thereby, the rotation member 620 is pivotally supported by the support fastening portion 615 so as not to fall off.

  The transmission long hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed. However, details will be described later.

  The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened and fixed to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft protruding to the back side through the through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, and A transmission gear 633 that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 613b of the front lid member 612 while meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 613c of the front lid member 612 while meshing with the transmission gear 633. 634.

  In the state where the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c are inserted through the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, the fastening screws are screwed into the female screw portions formed at the distal end portions of the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c. Thereby, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are pivotally supported by the front lid member 612 so as not to fall off.

  The front lid member 612 is formed with an arc-shaped hole 613d formed so as to penetrate along an arc centered on the cylindrical portion 613c. The arc-shaped hole 613d has a front side at an eccentric position of the transmission gear cam 634. A cylindrical portion 634a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape is inserted into the cylindrical portion 634a.

  The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member having a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and extends from the above-described cylindrical portion 634a and the angular position including the cylindrical portion 634a in a plate shape in the outer diameter direction. An installation portion 634b.

  The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d, and is inserted into the transmission long hole 623 of the rotating member 620 on the front side. Here, the widths of the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 are designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. Thereby, sliding resistance at the time of the cylindrical part 634a sliding on the circular arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission long hole 623 can be reduced.

  The extending portion 634b is configured to be able to enter a detection groove of a photocoupler type detection sensor KS1 fastened and fixed to the front lid member 612. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is configured to be able to grasp the posture of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading the change in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

  The supported member 640 includes a long main body portion 641, a cylindrical portion 642 that protrudes from a back surface side of the main body portion 641 into a circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 and has a cylindrical cross section, A cylindrical portion 643 projecting in parallel with the cylindrical portion 642, and an intermediate gear 644 formed so as to be able to mesh with the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 643; The bottomed cylindrical part 645 formed in a large-diameter cylindrical shape having a perforated bottom on the back side of the intermediate gear 644, and the end opposite to the end where the bottomed cylindrical part 645 is disposed And an extended support portion 646 that extends to the front side.

  With the above-described configuration, it is possible to generate a driving force transmission between the gear tooth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620.

  The fastening screws are screwed into the female screw portions formed at the distal ends of the cylindrical portions 642 and 643 in a state where the cylindrical portions 642 and 643 are inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644. Thereby, the rotation member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are pivotally supported by the main body portion 641 of the supported member 640 so as not to drop off.

  The bottomed tubular portion 645 is arranged such that the back side of the bottom portion is close to the front side edge of the front lid member 612, and the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 can mesh with each other on the front side of the bottom portion. And an opening 645a formed in the peripheral surface portion, and an insertion hole 645b that is formed in a circular shape centering on the cylindrical center and through which the cylindrical support portion 651a can be inserted. Details of the shape will be described later.

  The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for pivotally supporting the second decorative rotating member 660, and details thereof will be described later.

  The first decorative rotation member 650 includes a main body member 651 that forms orthogonal rotation axes, a front rotation member 652 that is pivotally supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed tubular portion 645, and a front rotation member 652 thereof. An electric decoration board 653 fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b and having a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the front side, a rear rotating member 654 that is coaxially fixed to the rear rotating member 652 and fastened to the rear side; A wiring receiving member 655 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 651 from the front side to form a cylindrical space as a wiring passage, and a fastening screw that is disposed on the front side of the wiring receiving member 655 and is inserted into the main body member 651 from the rear side. A front decoration portion 656 that is fastened and fixed by being screwed in, and an axis-right-rotating member 657 that is externally supported by a cylindrical portion formed by the wiring receiving member 655 and the main body member 651.

  The main body member 651 includes a cylindrical support portion 651a extending in a cylindrical shape on the back side. The cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female screw portions 651b formed at the diameter position of the tip portion, and the female screw A cutout portion 651c is provided to be cut so as to reduce the wall portion on one side of a plane passing through the portion 651b.

  The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electric wiring to be inserted therein, and the notch portion 651c functions as an opening for securing the entrance of the electric wiring.

  The cylindrical support portion 651a includes, in order from the base end side, a center hole of the front rotation member 652, a center hole of the rear rotation member 654, an insertion hole 645b of the bottomed tubular portion 645, a stepped ring-shaped collar C1 and a front lid. The fastening screw inserted through the plate-like lid C2 is inserted into the guide long hole 616 of the member 612 and the female screw 651b at the tip thereof is screwed and fixed.

  That is, the above-described cylindrical support portion 651a, the front side rotation member 652, the rear side rotation member 654, the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the collar C1, and the dish-like lid portion C2 are coaxially supported and guided by the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction. It is configured to be displaceable along the long hole 616.

  The dish-like lid C2 has an opening C2a formed in a part of the circumferential portion thereof, and the opening C2a is disposed so as to face the notch 651c of the main body member 651 in the assembled state. Form.

  In this electric wiring, a part of the wiring passes through the inside of the right-angle rotating member 657, is guided into the second decorative rotating member 660, and the terminal is connected to the connector disposed on the electric decoration board 662. In addition, the other wiring is formed on the side formed opposite to the main body member 651 on the gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (upper side, that is, the upper and lower sides of the semi-cylindrical portion 655a). The terminal is guided to the back of the overhanging decorative portion 652b and connected to the connector of the electric decoration board 653.

  The rear side rotation member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumferential portion of the rear side end, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed so as to be capable of meshing with each other. In addition, the gear teeth 654a are formed along a part of the circumference, not over the entire circumference, as an arrangement sufficient for the operation described later.

  The front rotating member 652 includes gear teeth 652a formed as bevel gears, and an overhanging decorative portion 652b projecting radially outward. An electric decoration board 653 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, and an effect is produced in which the overhanging decorative portion 652b is turned on or blinked by light from the light emitting means arranged on the electric decoration board 653. It is possible.

  Since the front rotating member 652 is fastened and fixed to the rear rotating member 654, the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate integrally.

  The axis-right-rotating member 657 is rotatably supported by a circular cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portion 651d of the main body member 651 and the semi-cylindrical portion 655a of the wiring receiving member 655, and the gear of the front rotating member 652 is provided. Gear teeth 657a formed as bevel gears that can mesh with teeth 652a are provided.

  With such a configuration, the axis-right-rotating member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front-side rotating member 652. That is, although the front side rotation member 652, the rear side rotation member 654, and the shaft right angle rotation member 657 are interlocked, details of the operation will be described later. The gear teeth 652a and 657a are formed along a part of the circumference, not over the entire circumference, as an arrangement sufficient for the operation described later.

  The second decorative rotating member 660 includes a box-shaped member 661 that is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, an electric decoration board 662 that is fixed to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a box-shaped member 661. And a wiring retaining plate 663 fastened and fixed to the tip portions of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

  In the present embodiment, as the box-shaped member 661, which will be described later, rotates, the electric decoration board 662 is also rotationally displaced. Therefore, when guided by the connector of the electric decoration board 662, the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a There is a possibility that the electrical wiring passing between them may be twisted or the arrangement may be disordered, and the function of the wiring retaining plate 663 having a through hole for temporarily securing the wiring causes the twisting of the wiring or disorder. It avoids being placed in.

  In the present embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the electrical decoration substrate 662, it is inevitable that the electrical wiring is twisted. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not caused by one or more rotations, but is a rotational displacement that reverses at a rotation angle of 135 degrees. It is possible to avoid a situation where the wiring is broken.

  The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is configured to be rotatable with a rotation axis (rotation axis formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a) parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side surface having the longest side. The

  The axis-right-rotating member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so as not to fall off, with the wiring retaining plate 663 functioning as a retainer. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the shaft right angle rotating member 657, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the second decorative rotating member 660 is detached from the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

  The electrical decoration board 662 is disposed so that the thickness direction of the plate and the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661 are aligned. On the side surface in the thickness direction of the illumination board 662, the first effect surface 661 a is illuminated by light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the front side and facing the optical axis in the thickness direction, and disposed on the back side and the optical axis faces in the thickness direction. The second effect surface 661b is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED, and the third effect surface 661c is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the back side (the side that illuminates the second effect surface 661b) and having an optical axis in the width direction. It is.

  As described above, the light emitting means disposed on the electric decoration board 662 functions to individually illuminate each of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c, but the LED that illuminates the third effect surface 661c is on the back side (the second effect surface 661b). Since the second effect surface 661b is disposed on the front side (the projecting state of the first motion unit 600), the third effect surface 661c (the surface facing upward) is illuminated. When the LED is caused to emit light, the second effect surface 661b can be illuminated by light traveling at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

  That is, unlike the case where the LED is disposed behind the electric decoration board 662, it is possible to avoid the light from being hidden by the electric decoration board 662, so that the second effect surface 661b is emitted by the light illuminating the third effect surface 661c. Can also illuminate. Thereby, the kind of effect mode which illuminates the 2nd effect surface 661b can be increased, or the brightness of the 2nd effect surface 661b at the time of a light emission effect can be improved.

  The decoration fixing member 670 is provided with an electric decoration board 671 that is formed from a light-transmitting resin material so that decorative characters and figures can be visually recognized by the player, and irradiates light obliquely left frontward from the back side. . The arrangement of the decoration fixing member 670 is fixed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, and the player's line of sight with respect to the decoration fixing member 670 is always a line of sight inclined obliquely to the right. That is, by tilting the direction of the light emitted from the electric decoration board 671 to the left side, it is possible to irradiate the side where the player's eyes are easily placed.

  The decorative fixing member 670 has a lower edge portion and a right edge portion raised on the back side, and a front and rear gap is formed between the upper edge portion and the left edge portion and the front lid member 612. This front-rear gap functions as a gap that passes when the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced.

  40 is a front view of first operation unit 600 in the effect standby state, FIG. 41 is a rear view of first operation unit 600 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 42 is a view in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 5 is a side view of the first operation unit 600. FIG. In addition, in order to make an understanding of a shape easy, illustration of the base member 611 (refer FIG. 38) and a fastening screw is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the production standby state, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (for example, parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission elongated hole 623. Thereby, the displacement resistance at the time of starting displacement while the cylindrical part 634a slides in the transmission long hole 623 can be reduced. That is, at the start of displacement, inertial assistance cannot be obtained as compared to the middle of displacement, and the driving force that needs to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to increase, so that the displacement resistance is reduced as in this embodiment. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 631 at the start of displacement.

  Moreover, the same thing is comprised so that it may be materialized also about the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical part 634a in an overhang | projection state (refer FIG. 45). In other words, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a disposed in the transmission elongated hole 623 at both end positions of the rotating member 620 (the position in the effect standby state and the position in the extended state) is The displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (that is, the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed so as to be along the longitudinal direction (for example, parallel). As a result, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 631 at the start of displacement of the rotating member 620 from both end positions.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with the intermediate gear 644 from both sides. In the present embodiment, the radius R1 of the gear tooth portion 625 and the radius R2 of the gear tooth 654a are designed to have the same length, so that the rotation angle of the gear tooth portion 625 with respect to the intermediate gear 644 and the rear angle with respect to the intermediate gear 644 The rotation angle of the side rotation member 654 is the same angle.

  Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotation member 654 can be configured to change depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 and the gear teeth 657a of the right-angle rotating member 657 mesh with each other, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is orthogonal to the rotating shaft. It is transmitted to the second decorative rotating member 660.

  The rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is the same as the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a of the front rotation member 652. That is, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

  In this embodiment, since the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are the same (gear ratio is 1), the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is: This is the same as the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

  Next, the displacement of the first operation unit 600 from the effect standby state will be described in time series. FIG. 43 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate effect state, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate effect state. FIG. 45 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the extended state, and FIG. 46 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the extended state. In order to facilitate understanding of the shape, the base member 611 and the fastening screw are not shown.

  The rotation angle of the rotation member 620 is set to 19 degrees between the effect standby state and the intermediate effect state, and the rotation angle of the rotation member 620 is 26 degrees between the intermediate effect state and the overhanging state. Is set to

  In the intermediate effect state of the first motion unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture with the narrow third effect surface 661c facing the front side. In the overhanging state of the first motion unit 600, the second effect surface 661b is configured to face the front side (see FIG. 45).

  As shown in FIG. 44, the guide slot 616 is connected to the linear portion 616a formed on a straight line extending in the vertical direction from the upper end portion, and to the lower end portion of the linear portion 616a, and is on a curve (substantially arc shape). The curved portion 616b is formed.

  In the intermediate performance state of the first motion unit 600, the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, in the extended state of the first motion unit 600, the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

  Therefore, the displacement of the axis O1 between the effect standby state and the intermediate effect state becomes a linear displacement along the linear part 616a, and the displacement of the axis O1 between the intermediate effect state and the overhanging state changes to the curved part. It is configured to have a curved displacement along 616b.

  The first operation unit 600 is configured to be able to change its state as described above, and the rotation member 620 is disposed on the base end side of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving a driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first decorative rotating member 650, and the second decorative rotating member 660 are driven by the displacement of the rotating member 620. .

  Therefore, without countermeasures, there is a possibility that the displacement resistance generated between the guide long hole 616 and the guide long hole 616 increases due to the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide long hole 616. The configuration is such that the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 616 is along the displacement direction, thereby suppressing this.

  For example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state (FIG. 41) is a displacement that tilts downward, and the guide slot 616 is also formed to extend downward. Further, for example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the overhanging state (see FIG. 46) is a displacement that rises in the diagonally upward right direction, and the guide slot 616 is also formed to extend diagonally upward to the right. Has been.

  As described above, the displacement resistance of the portion (and the axis O1) that displaces the inside of the guide long hole 616 is adjusted by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 and the longitudinal direction of the guide long hole 616. Can be suppressed.

  Next, the effect exerted by the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described with reference to FIG. 47 including other effects. FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the displacement amount and the displacement angle of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620. FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b) show the rotational member. It is a schematic diagram showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member 640 when 620 is rotated in the tilting direction in a mode in which the angular velocity is constant. In addition, the positive / negative of the numerical value is illustrated as positive displacement amount and negative displacement amount, and in FIG. 48B, the numerical value of FIG. 48A is illustrated as a bar graph.

  In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the support positions of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation of the rotation member 620 is illustrated at intervals of 10 degrees as the rotation angle of the rotation member 620, and the tension of the first operation unit 600 is illustrated. The turning member 620 in the extended state is illustrated by a solid line.

  In FIG. 47, the angle θ is illustrated as an angle between the line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624 and the line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622. Yes.

  The guide slot 616 functions as a slot that guides the end of the supported member 640 in which the axis O1 is disposed. The displacement in the guide long hole 616 is a displacement caused by the displacement of the tubular portion 642 of the supported member 640 connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotation member 620 as the rotation member 620 rotates. Hereinafter, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as a main driving side of the supported member 640, and an end portion of the supported member 640 where the axis O1 is disposed is also referred to as a driven side of the supported member 640.

  An outline of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotation member 620 is based on the vertical displacement of the rotation tip (the main drive side of the supported member 640) due to the rotation of the rotation member 620 and the attitude displacement of the supported member 640. This occurs as a result of adding up and down displacement on the driven side of the supported member 640.

  In the production standby state, in addition to the supported member 640 being in the vertical posture, the displacement velocity component of the rotation member 620 is larger in the left-right direction than in the vertical direction (the arrangement of the rotation arm is 45 degrees from the vertical to the left-right). Range). That is, the conditions for decreasing the vertical displacement are doubled.

  Both of these conditions are reversed in the overhang state, and the conditions for increasing the displacement in the vertical direction are doubled. Accordingly, the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement and the speed is high at the end of the downward displacement.

  Next, details of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The displacement (tilt displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the production standby state to the overhanging state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced, the driven side of the supported member 640 is mainly displaced by its own weight.

  Therefore, when the guide long hole 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may drop vigorously. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the first motion unit 600 be stopped in the intermediate effect state (the midway position of the tilt displacement, see FIG. 44).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the shape of the guide long hole 616, a mode in which the curved portion 616b is combined below the linear portion 616a is adopted. Thereby, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced by its own weight in the linear part 616a and enters the curved part 616b, the displacement resistance applied to the driven side of the supported member 640 can be increased. Thereby, it can be made easy to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from dropping vigorously beyond the arrangement in the intermediate effect state.

  The displacement on the driven side of the supported member 640 in the linear portion 616a will be described. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the main driving side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the production standby state, the main drive side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the right side of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate production state, the main drive side of the supported member 640 is on the left side of the linear portion 616a. Is arranged (see FIG. 44). Therefore, the driven side of the supported member 640 is reciprocated in the vertical direction while the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced without changing its direction.

  Accordingly, since the vertical displacement on the driven side of the supported member 640 can be kept small compared to the magnitude of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, the driven side of the supported member 640 is a linear portion. While being arranged at 616a, the supported member 640 can be shown to the player in such a displacement manner as if it was rotationally displaced about the driven side of the supported member 640.

  According to this displacement mode, it is possible to generate a slide displacement in the left-right direction using the run-up due to the rotational displacement centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, so that the entire supported member 640 can be moved from the start of the displacement. Compared with the case where the slide displacement is performed in the left-right direction, the load required for the displacement can be kept low. Therefore, the load required at the start of operation of the supported member 640 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required for the drive motor 631 can be reduced. Thereby, cost reduction of the drive motor 631 can be achieved.

  On the other hand, while the displacement on the driven side of the supported member 640 is suppressed to be small, the displacement of the main moving portion of the supported member 640 is sufficiently secured along with the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620, and the supported member 640. The rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 with respect to the main driving portion is maintained in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the back (the direction is not switched). Thereby, as described above, the orientation change direction of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 are maintained without being switched (inverted).

  Thereby, it is possible to avoid giving the player an impression that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are reciprocating (returning operation). The displacement mode can be a momentary displacement mode.

  Further, even in a situation where the displacement of the main moving portion of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement direction of the main moving portion of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component, Moreover, since the displacement is in the direction (downward) along the direction of gravity, the load required to start the rotation of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required for the drive motor 631 can be reduced. can do. Thereby, cost reduction of the drive motor 631 can be achieved.

  The operation caused by the curved portion 616b will be described. A state where the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as an intermediate effect state of the first motion unit 600. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotation member 620 from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed in the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the range of the angular width of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG.

  First, as a premise, there is no necessity to adopt a curved portion in the guide slot 616. That is, as described above, the guide slot 616 may be composed of only a straight portion regardless of whether or not a portion that is bent to increase displacement resistance in the intermediate performance state is used.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 616b is purposely employed to prevent the driven-side speed of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of displacement. This will be described below.

  Whether guided by the straight portion 616a or guided by the curved portion 616b, when the main driven side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 is The downward displacement is the same.

  As a difference, in the case of being guided by the curved portion 616b, in the upper half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the main driven side of the supported member 640 (rightward). ) In the lower half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is oriented along the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven member of the supported member 640 (leftward). A curved portion 616b is formed so as to be displaced and guided to the left.

  Thereby, even before the amount of downward displacement of the supported member 640 on the main drive side becomes large (tilt start side), the driven member displacement of the supported member 640 is swung to the left and right. A large displacement speed on the driven side of 640 can be secured.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. In other words, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced up and down in an arbitrary path from a specific initial position to the end position, if the time required for the displacement is the same, the result of integrating the speed in the vertical direction is equal, In the case of slow displacement at the start of displacement, the displacement speed increases at the end.

  When the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the virtual axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction illustrated in FIG. 47 for comparison, the displacement speed gradually increases from the tilting displacement start side of the rotating member 620. It becomes the maximum at the displacement end (displacement lower end) of the supported member 640. In other words, the vertical displacement of the virtual axis OE1 during the same period is compared with the vertical displacement UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide slot 616 while the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the displacement lower end. The quantity UE1 increases.

  Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis OE1, there is a possibility that the driven side of the supported member 640 jumps back, and when performing an effect of stopping the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement, It will adversely affect the production.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, by adopting the curvilinear portion 616b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 becomes larger is the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. Also, the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform.

  Uniformization in this case is not only meant to bring the speed to be the same over the entire range of displacement, but is used to mean that the magnitude of the speed is suppressed. In particular, in the present embodiment, in the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases on the entry start side to the curved portion 616b and enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b. After the start, the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is configured to gradually decrease.

  That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, the displacement of the supported member 640 becomes monotonous by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. Can be avoided.

  Further, the rotational member 620 is moved upward (rising up) by reducing the speed required for the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side portion of the curved portion 616b, that is, the amount of displacement required per unit time. Since the amount of displacement for lifting the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time can be reduced at the start of driving when the operation is performed, the burden on the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the rotation of the second decorative rotation member 660 accompanying the rotation displacement of the rotation member 620 will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing a change in the angle θ [degrees] accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620.

  The angle θ can be equated with the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 around the circular through hole 624, and is directly connected to the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660. That is, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is defined corresponding to the magnitude of the angle θ.

  In this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear tooth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the gear teeth 652a and the gear of the axis-right rotating member 657 are used. Both the rotation transmission ratios with the teeth 657a (see FIG. 38) are set to 1. Therefore, the angle θ and the rotation angle of the axis-right-angle rotation member 657 are the same, so that the change in the angle θ can be grasped as a change in the attitude of the second decoration rotation member 660.

  The change of the angle θ is 45 degrees from the effect standby state of the first motion unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate effect state of the first motion unit 600 (see FIG. 44). From the state to the extended state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 46) is 90 degrees.

  In the effect standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture in which the first effect surface 661a is inclined to the left by 45 degrees (the third effect surface 661c is to the right by 45 degrees). Accordingly, every time the state is switched in order from the intermediate effect state and the overhang state, the second effect rotation member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third effect surface 661c faces the front side (see FIG. 43), and then the second effect The production surface 661b faces the front side (see FIG. 45).

  The setting of the angle θ is realized by the design of the guide long hole 616 for defining the posture of the supported member 640. That is, in the present embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 is designed so as to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 according to the angle θ.

  Thus, even when only the sensor that detects the arrangement of the rotation member 620 is provided as the detection sensor KS1 as in the present embodiment, the second decorative rotation member 660 is based on the output of the detection sensor KS1. The sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the arrangement and orientation.

  That is, if the extended portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state (see FIG. 41), and the drive motor 631 from that state is determined. The rotation angle of the rotation member 620 and the arrangement and posture of the second decoration rotation member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle of the first rotation.

  Here, the change amount of the angle θ is not proportional to the rotation angle amount of the rotation member 620. Therefore, when determining the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not necessary to obtain a numerical value by proportional calculation from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631. In addition, this makes it possible to avoid the rotation speed of the second decorative rotation member 660 from becoming constant even when the rotation member 620 is rotated at a constant speed. This will be described below.

  The change in the angle θ is substantially the same as the change in the amount of change in the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640. That is, the angle change from the intermediate effect state to the overhanging state is generally larger than the angle change from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state (about 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees). Large (about 20 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b).

  On the other hand, the change in angle from the intermediate effect state to the overhang state gradually decreases from the approach position of the driven member of the supported member 640 to the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and finally from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect. It will be below the level of angle change to the state (decrease to about 7 degrees).

  As described above, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is similarly changed by changing the numerical value of the angle θ relative to the rotation of the rotation member 620 per unit angle. Can be configured. That is, in the range where the numerical value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is likely to be small and the posture can be easily maintained. On the other hand, in the range where the numerical value of the angle θ is large, the second decorative rotation is performed. The rotation angle of the member 660 is likely to be large, and the surfaces directed to the player side (effect surfaces 661a to 661c) can be easily changed quickly.

  From the above-described configuration, the second decorative rotating member 660 can be moderately displaced. In the displacement operation of the second decorative rotating member 660, as described above, the arrangement change and the posture change accompanying the displacement of the supported member 640 and the center of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are formed. The rotational displacement about the rotational axis is executed simultaneously.

  The rotational angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement around the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a is such that the driven side of the supported member 640 changes from the linear portion 616a of the guide slot 616 to the curved portion 616b. It grows conspicuously at the timing of entering.

  That is, in the tilt displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate effect state is reached, and is slightly moved up and down (bounces back) from the driven side arrangement of the supported member 640 in the intermediate effect state. Even in this case, it is possible to maintain the second decoration rotating member 660 in a state where the third effect surface 661c faces the front side (see FIG. 43).

  On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate effect state, the rotational speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases when the rotating member 620 rotates at a constant speed, and the posture change in the rotating direction changes. Remarkably visible. That is, the player can visually recognize the second decorative rotating member 660 as if it is instantaneously rotationally displaced.

  In the present embodiment, the second effect surface 661b of the second decorative rotation member 660 is directed to the front side at the rotation end (displacement lower end) of the rotation member 620, and is disposed in the vicinity of the decoration fixing member 670. In view of being integrally viewed (see FIG. 28), it is desirable that the driven side of the supported member 640 can be prevented from jumping upward from the state in which the rotating member 620 is disposed at the lower end of the displacement.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by configuring the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 as described above, the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform, so that the rotating member 620 It can prevent beforehand that the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 in the state arrange | positioned at a displacement lower end becomes excessive, and can prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

  In addition to the uniform displacement speed, the arrangement of the supported member 640 and the center of the second decorative rotating member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 (for example, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 643). However, it is comprised so that it may approach to the support fastening part 615 as a rotating shaft of the rotation member 620 closest. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the rotation tip of the rotation member 620 from being exposed to the weight of the supported member 640 or the second decorative rotation member 660 supported on the rotation tip side of the rotation member 620. The rotational displacement can be stabilized.

  In addition, the lower half of the curved portion 616b is in a direction (upper left) in which the lower end of the rotating member 620 rebounds around the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 on the driven side of the supported member 640. It is comprised so that the displacement of this may be disturbed suitably. That is, in the lower half of the curved portion 616b, the direction inclined in the upper left direction is a short direction, and displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in this direction can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the member 640 from bouncing back.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced following the displacement of the driven member of the supported member 640 and the case where the driven side of the supported member 640 stops at the end of the displacement. And the displacement direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 is different.

  In the former case, it is assumed that if there is no guidance, the displacement is to the lower left along the displacement direction of the supported member 640 on the main drive side (the rotation direction of the rotation member 620). By being guided by 616, it is slightly shaken in the left-right direction as the direction along the guide slot 616, and is displaced downward.

  On the other hand, the latter is a circular track centered on the main drive side of the supported member 640, and is therefore not in the direction along the guide long hole 616 but in the displacement direction along the short direction of the guide long hole 616. Thereby, the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 can be suppressed, and the supported member 640 can be prevented from bouncing back.

  The feature of the rising direction displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described. In the state change from the extended state of the first motion unit 600 to the effect standby state, the rotation member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

  The load required when the rotating member 620 is raised and displaced (that is, the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) is mainly the first decoration disposed on the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the supported member 640. This is used to move the rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660 upward and to rotate the second decorative rotating member 660.

  That is, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660, the more the load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 can be reduced.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, the rotation member 620 starts to rotate from the extended state of the first operation unit 600 and is proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660. Is designed so that the value of the angle θ to be minimized. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load required when the rotating member 620 is raised and displaced.

  At the end of the rising displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction displacement, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 around the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640 is in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 ( (Positioning facing up and down)).

  Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as the inertial force in the rotation direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 is reduced. The moving member 620 can be generated as a load that is twisted about the longitudinal direction as an axis, and the rotating member 620 can withstand a small amount of elastic displacement locally by dispersing the load in the longitudinal direction.

  Therefore, compared with the case where the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rotation member 620 when viewed from the front, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the rotation member 620 is broken so as to be broken. . In addition, an excessive elastic displacement of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front lid member 612, and a load that cannot be received by the rotating member 620 is resisted by elastic deformation of the front lid member 612. As a result, damage to the rotating member 620 can be prevented.

  The displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b will be described. The overhanging decorative portion 652b is a member that is rotationally displaced about the axis O1, and the rotation angle thereof corresponds to the angle θ described above. Therefore, even if the change in the arrangement of the supported member 640 on the driven side is small, such as a change from the production standby state to the overhanging state, the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates if the angle θ changes. .

  The change in the angle θ from the production standby state to the overhanging state is about 135 degrees, and the overhanging decoration portion 652b rotates at about 45 degrees. Here, when the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates counterclockwise by 45 degrees from the production standby state, it feels like it collides with other operation units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). In this embodiment, since the supported member 640 itself that becomes the reference for the rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b changes its posture in a manner that it rotates clockwise, the other operation unit 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) Collisions can be avoided.

  In other words, since the overhanging decorative portion 652b is configured to be displaceable with reference to the supported member 640, the space required for the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

  For example, when the overhanging decorative portion 652b is a portion that is fixedly arranged with respect to the supported member 640 in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the supported member 640 is arranged from the overhanging state to the production standby state arrangement. The overhanging decorative portion 652b projects to the upper left side of the supported member 640 and collides with another operation unit 800, or partially hides the overhanging display on the front side of the display area of the 3rd symbol display device 81. May have an adverse effect on the production.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the overhanging decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the main driven side of the supported member 640 with respect to the driven side of the supported member 640, the supported member When 640 projects to the third symbol display device 81 side, it projects in conjunction with it, and when the supported member 640 displaces to the side to retract from the third symbol display device 81, it retracts in conjunction with it. Therefore, the arrangement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the retracted state can be formed on the side away from the third symbol display device 81.

  The rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 in the player's view can be obtained by the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640. That is, it is 45 degrees as a difference between about 135 degrees that is the change width of the angle θ and about 90 degrees that is the attitude change angle of the supported member 640.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be equal regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided into the angles a1 and a2 on the lower side of the horizontal line and the angles b1 and b2 on the upper side of the horizontal line, the angle θ and the attitude of the supported member 640 are obtained. The difference from the change is obtained as ((a1 + b1) − (a2 + b2)) − (b1−b2) = (a1−a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotation member 620.

  Accordingly, the rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the posture of the supported member 640 becomes equal to the rotation angle of the rotation member 620. Therefore, if the rotation member 620 is rotated and displaced at a constant angular velocity, Although the displacement speed of the support member 640 is not constant, the angular speed of rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 is constant.

  Therefore, it is as if the overhanging decorative portion 652b disposed on the supported member 640 is driven at a constant angular velocity by a driving means different from the driving motor 631 that drives the rotating member 620. Can be visually recognized.

  With such a configuration, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 may be a slide movement or a rotation movement section in the player's view. The displacement mode of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode that is not a machine.

  This action is realized by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 by dividing a section where the posture change is large with respect to the displacement amount in the slide direction and a section where the posture change is small with respect to the displacement amount in the slide direction. be able to. That is, the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates relative to the supported member 640 in accordance with the rotation angle of the rotation member 620. From the viewpoint of the player, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is the displacement of the supported member 640. As influenced by the dominant side.

  Accordingly, the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as being rotationally displaced in a section where the posture change is large with respect to the displacement amount in the slide direction, and is stretched in a section where the posture change is small relative to the displacement amount in the slide direction. It can be visually recognized that the projecting decoration part 652b is slidingly displaced.

  As described above, the rotation member 620 can be rotationally displaced so as to constitute an effect standby state, an intermediate effect state, and an overhang state, and has been described as being displaced from one displacement end to the other displacement end. However, the drive direction may be switched so as to be displaced in the reverse direction at an intermediate position in the displacement range.

  For example, after turning the rotation member 620 from the production standby state to the intermediate production state, the drive direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed to control to return to the production standby state. In this case, since it is necessary to stop the rotation member 620 in the middle of lowering, there is a possibility that the rotation speed of the rotation member 620 needs to be set lower in order to make the stop position accurate.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the numerical value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) changes in an increasing tendency in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state as compared with the effect standby state. The magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 as described above.

  Therefore, in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state in which the rotation amount of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, the amount of driving force that is distributed to the second decorative rotating member 660 increases. The amount allocated to the rotational displacement can be reduced, and the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620 can be automatically suppressed.

  In other words, since the rotation speed of the rotation member 620 can be reduced as the rotation amount of the second decorative rotation member 660 increases, the rotation speed of the rotation member 620 is set to be low in advance. Even if this is not done, the rotation member 620 can be easily stopped in the vicinity of the intermediate performance state.

  Next, the second operation unit 700 will be described. The second operation unit 700 is an operation unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the back case 510, and is the field of view of the player who sees the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 28). In order to ensure the performance, the production standby state (see FIG. 28) retracts below the opening 511a, the overhanging state (see FIG. 30) that is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 and attracts attention, The state is mainly switched between the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 35) as the state of.

  FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the back case 510 and the second operation unit 700, and FIG. 51 is an exploded back perspective view of the back case 510 and the second operation unit 700. 50 and 51, the members around the up / down / inversion effect device 770 are mainly shown in a disassembled state, and the up / down / inversion effect device 770 is shown in a non-disassembled state.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the second operation unit 700 includes a right front plate member 710 that is fastened and fixed to the lower right corner of the back case 510, and between the right front plate member 710 and the back case 510. A rotating arm member 720 disposed and rotatable about a cylindrical projecting portion 511b of the back case 510, a drive transmission device 730 configured to transmit a driving force to the rotating arm member 720, and A lifting plate member 740 configured to be guided and connected to a tip end portion of the rotating arm member 720, and a rear left side fastened and fixed to a lower left corner portion of the rear case 510 on the back side of the lifting plate member 740. A plate member 750, a pair of front support members 760 that are configured as a pair of left and right and fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750, and the back on the front side of the metal rod 702 A blindfold decorative member 768 fastened and fixed to the case 510, and a lift / reverse effect device 770 configured to be displaceable in a manner in which the lift plate member 740 and the front support member 760 are combined with a lift displacement and a longitudinal displacement. .

  The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support portion 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, a gap forming portion 712 that is recessed from the rear side at the left edge portion and forms a gap between the rear case 510, A plurality of (three in the present embodiment) detection sensors 713 arranged to detect the arrangement of the detected portion 735 of the drive transmission device 730, and in a mode toward the front side toward the upper side on the left side front side. A front upper inclined portion 714 formed so as to be able to guide the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the up-and-down reversal effect production device 770 and a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted from the back side of the rear case 510 is screwed are formed. A plurality of fastened portions 718.

  The detection sensors 713 are arranged at intervals so that a plurality of photocoupler sensors are arranged with detection grooves at positions where the detected portion 735 can enter. Each of the detection sensors 713 includes the position of the detected unit 735 when the second operation unit 700 is in the effect standby state, the position of the detected unit 735 when the second operation unit 700 is in the intermediate effect state, and the overhang of the second operation unit 700. It arrange | positions so that it may correspond to the position of the to-be-detected part 735 in a state.

  That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch the output depending on whether the second operation unit 700 is in the production standby state, the intermediate production state, or the overhanging state, and the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second operation unit 700.

  The rotating arm member 720 is pivotally supported by a cylindrical projecting portion 511b projecting in a cylindrical shape from the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510 to the front side, and is formed in a long plate shape having a U-shape when viewed from the front. Main body portion 721 and a cylindrical support portion 722 that is formed in a cylindrical shape projecting rearward at a bent portion of the main body portion 721 and has an inner peripheral side shape that can be inserted through the cylindrical projecting portion 511b. A long hole portion 723 drilled in a long hole shape along the longitudinal direction at the right end portion of the main body portion 721, and a front direction (projection direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 711a) at the left end portion of the main body portion 721. A cylindrical fastened portion 724 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical fastening portion 724, and a rear portion at an intermediate position between the cylindrical fastened portion 724 and the support cylinder portion 722. Cylindrical fastened with a cylindrical shape protruding to the inner circumference It includes a 725, and a torsion spring SP2 to provide a biasing force of the rise in the main body 721 (direction of lifting the left side) with the rear case 510 is wrapped around the supporting tube portion 722.

  The left side portion of the main body portion 721 is formed with a step so that the arrangement is shifted to the front side as compared with the base end side portion of the support cylinder portion 722, and the support plate is formed in the gap portion formed on the back side by the step. 701 is disposed.

  The support plate 701 is a plate-like portion that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, and includes an arc-shaped elongated hole portion 701a that is drilled so as to guide the cylindrical fastened portion 725. When the fastening screw inserted through the long hole portion 701a with the ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 725, the rotating arm member 720 is supported by the support plate via the cylindrical fastened portion 725. 701 is supported so that it cannot be removed.

  Since the support plate 701 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, the left side portion of the rotating arm member 720 is restricted from being displaced away from the back case 510 to the front side. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the rotation arm member 720 from being displaced to the front side due to the load applied to the left side of the rotation arm member 720, so that the displacement of the rotation arm member 720 is stably supported. be able to.

  The right side portion of the main body 721 is disposed in the gap between the back case 510 and the gap forming portion 712. That is, the displacement in the front-rear direction of the right side portion of the main body 721 is limited by the back case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

  The long hole portion 723 is formed in a shape in which a straight line passing through the center of the width and extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support cylinder portion 722. Therefore, when the load applied to the long hole portion 723 is directed in the long direction of the long hole portion 723, the rotation direction component of the rotation arm member 720 of the load is zero.

  The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits a driving force through the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720. The drive transmission device 730 is fastened and fixed to the right front plate member 710 from the front side, and the drive motor 731. A drive gear 732 fixed to the drive shaft, a transmission gear 733 meshed with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 meshed with the transmission gear 733.

  The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are respectively pivotally supported by a plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 711a that project in a cylindrical shape on the back side of the right front plate member 710 at corresponding positions. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 711a, and a fastening screw inserted through the shaft hole of the transmission gear 733 or the gear cam member 734 can be screwed. When these fastening screws are screwed and fixed, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 711a so as not to fall off.

  The transmission support portion 711 includes the above-described cylindrical projecting portion 711 a and an arc-shaped hole 711 b that is drilled in an arc shape around the cylindrical projecting portion 711 a that pivotally supports the gear cam member 734.

  The gear cam member 734 has an arc shape centered on the rotation shaft portion and projects to the front side so as to be inserted into the arc-shaped hole 711b. The gear cam member 734 extends so as to have a longer diameter than the gear portion. An extended portion 736, and a cylindrical protruding portion 736a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the distal end portion to the back side of the extended portion 736.

  The detected portion 735 is formed so as to be disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and the attitude of the gear cam member 734 is changed to the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) by the output from the detection sensor 713. Is configured as a part for enabling detection.

  The cylindrical projecting portion 736 a is formed so as to be able to be inserted into the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 736 a is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720 via the long hole portion 723. Is done.

  A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a, and a fastening screw inserted through the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed. When the fastening screw is screwed and fixed, the rotating arm member 720 is connected to the cylindrical protruding portion 736a so as not to drop off.

  The elevating plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down as the rotating arm member 720 rotates, and is guided on the left end side and guided in the vertical direction, and on the lower end side of the guided member 741. A horizontally long member 742 that is fastened to the left and right.

  The guided member 741 is formed such that a metal rod 702 fixed to the back case 510 in a posture in which the longitudinal direction is aligned in the vertical direction can be inserted, and can be displaced in the vertical direction along the metal rod 702. The tip of the protruding portion protruding from the left and right sides of the guided member 741 to the back side comes into contact with the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, so that the shaft rotation of the guided member 741 is restricted. The attitude of the guided member 741 is stabilized.

  As the guided member 741 is stabilized in posture, the laterally long member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is stabilized.

  The horizontally long member 742 includes a long hole portion 743 that is formed in an oblong shape that is elongated in the left and right directions with a vertical width through which the cylindrical fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 can be inserted, and an upper side of the long hole portion 743. A cylindrical portion 744 projecting in a cylindrical shape on the front side, and a pair of guide portions 745 disposed below the bottom portion at a position equidistant from side to side with respect to the cylindrical portion 744. Prepare.

  A lifting screw inserted through the long hole 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 724, so that the lifting plate member 740 is turned through the cylindrical fastened portion 724. The member 720 is supported so as not to drop off.

  The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion through which the insertion cylindrical portion 773 of the up / down reversal effect device 770 is inserted and supports the up / down reversal effect device 770 in a state where it can be displaced forward and backward. That is, the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is not fixed to the up-and-down plate member 740 but is arranged on the front side of the up-and-down plate member 740 in such a manner that it can be displaced back and forth with respect to the up-and-down plate member 740.

  A coil spring CS2 is disposed so as to wind around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion cylindrical portion 773. The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction that separates the lift plate member 740 and the lift / reverse effect device 770.

  The guide portion 745 is configured by a pair of left and right, and a rotating cylinder that is rotatably supported by a long plate portion 745a at the front and rear and a pair of front and rear shaft portions that project from the plate portion 745a to the left and right outside. Part 745b.

  The rotating cylinder portion 745b rotates when the above-described up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced back and forth, and functions as a portion that guides the displacement in the front-rear direction. Details will be described later.

  The left rear plate member 750 is formed to be inclined in a manner toward the front side toward the upper side on the front side of the right side portion, similarly to the front upper inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, and the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770. And a plurality of fastened portions 752 formed with female screw portions into which fastening screws inserted from the back side of the back case 510 are screwed.

  The blindfold decorative member 768 includes a three-dimensional decoration portion 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a substrate on which LEDs are fixed to the front side is disposed on the back side of the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a. The three-dimensional decoration 768a can be illuminated with light emitted from the LED.

  Each of the front support members 760 is disposed adjacent to the right and left inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761 having an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and the plate rear surface is directed upward. And a receiving inclined portion 762 that is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side.

  The fixing plate portion 761 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by inserting a fastening screw inserted from the front side into the insertion hole into the corresponding female screw portion. It is a board part.

  In this fixed position, the receiving inclined portion 762 is disposed in front of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751. That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751, and the rotary cylinder portion 774 e of the up-and-down inversion effect device 770 is guided in this guide path, so that the up-and-down inversion effect device 770 is in the front-rear direction It is configured to move up and down while being displaced. Hereinafter, this up-and-down displacement will be described.

  52A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 52B is a second operation unit 700 taken along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. 4 is a sectional view of the center frame 86. FIG. 52 (a) and 52 (b) illustrate the effect standby state of the second motion unit 700.

  53A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 53B is a second operation unit 700 taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 4 is a sectional view of the center frame 86. FIG. 53 (a) and 53 (b) show an intermediate effect state of the second motion unit 700. FIG.

  54A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along the line LIVa-LIVa of FIG. 30, and FIG. 54B is a second operation unit 700 taken along the line LIVb-LIVb of FIG. 4 is a sectional view of the center frame 86. FIG. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the overhanging state of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated.

  The up-and-down displacement effect of the up-and-down / inversion effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 shown in FIGS. 52 to 54 is generated by transmitting the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 to the rotating arm member 720. The drive force transmission at the time of the up-and-down displacement of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 will be described. In this description, FIGS. 28, 30 and 33 are referred to as appropriate.

  At the start of transmission of driving force from the production standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is the length of the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720. Since it is designed to be parallel to the direction, the displacement resistance generated at the start of rotation of the gear cam member 734 can be suppressed. The same is true in the overhanging state.

  On the other hand, in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 30), since the displacement direction of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723, the gear cam member 734 receives from the rotating arm member 720 in the rotational direction. When the displacement resistance is maximized, the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734 can be easily stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 52 to FIG. 54, the up-and-down reversal effect producing device 770 of the second operation unit 700 is disposed on the back side below the center frame 86 and is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86. Accordingly, it is configured to be displaced to the front side in the front-rear direction.

  The displacement resistance of this displacement is determined by the configuration in which the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is guided by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751, the first horizontal plate 774b and the first This is reduced by the configuration in which the two horizontal plates 774c are guided by the rotary cylinder portion 745b of the elevating plate member 740.

  That is, the pair of rotating cylinder portions 774e are arranged at symmetrical positions, such as a receiving inclined portion 762 and front upper inclined portions 714, 751 (the front upper inclined portion 751 is arranged on the left side not shown in FIG. 52, FIG. The rotation cylinder portion 774e rolls around the cylindrical portion 774d, thereby performing displacement along the receiving inclination portion 762 and the front upper inclination portions 714, 751. The displacement resistance of the main body member 771 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, as the arrangement of the rotating cylinder portion 745b aligned in the front-rear direction, the tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be suppressed by designing the front-side rotating cylinder portion 745b to be disposed slightly upward, thereby rotating the rotation cylinder portion 745b. The cylindrical portion 774e avoids applying an excessive load to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751.

  In other words, in this embodiment, the center of gravity (rotation axis position) of the rendering device 780 is designed to be located slightly in front of the front-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is always tilted forward by gravity. Is biased in the direction. Due to the influence of this urging force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c are likely to be displaced such that the front side is lowered and the rear side is raised.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b that is disposed in proximity when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b is lowered is disposed slightly above, and is disposed in proximity when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c is raised. The rotating cylinder portion 745b on the rear side is disposed slightly below. Therefore, the forward tilt displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

  Further, according to this configuration, the front rotary cylinder portion 745b has a gap between it and the second horizontal plate 774c, so that it can stably roll with the first horizontal plate 774b. Since the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b has a gap with the first horizontal plate 774b, it can stably roll with the second horizontal plate 774c. Thereby, rolling of the rotation cylinder part 745b can be produced normally, and the displacement resistance at the time of the main body member 771 displacing to the front-back direction can be reduced.

  The displacement to the front side of the up-and-down reversal effect production device 770 is caused by the urging force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the above-described shape guidance. Therefore, the displacement resistance of the front-rear direction displacement can be reduced when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced upward and the front-side displacement is compared with when the displacement is lowered.

  The vertical displacement of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is performed by the driving force of the driving motor 731, and the driving force is divided into a vertical displacement and a longitudinal displacement. In the vertical displacement, the burden of displacement in the upward direction is relatively large because of the necessity of combating gravity. In this case, the displacement in the front-rear direction can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive driving force required when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced upward.

  The length of the coil spring CS2 is set to be a natural length in the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 53) of the second operation unit 700. That is, when the up / down reversal effect device 770 is arranged below the intermediate effect state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 causes the front / rear direction effect device 770 to be displaced in the front-rear direction by the driving force of the drive motor 731. On the other hand, when the up / down reversal effect device 770 is arranged above the intermediate effect state, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the longitudinal displacement of the up / down reversion effect device 770.

  Thereby, arrangement | positioning of the raising / lowering inversion production apparatus 770 can be maintained easily in an intermediate production state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is driven and controlled from the production standby state of the second operation unit 700 and the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate production state, the stop timing is slightly less than ideal. Even if it becomes faster, the second operation unit 700 can be displaced toward the intermediate effect state by the urging force of the coil spring CS2.

  Further, for example, when the stop control is similarly performed, even if the stop timing is slightly later than ideal, the second operation unit 700 is lowered by its own weight, and the lowering due to its own weight is caused by the urging force of the coil spring CS2. By being suppressed, the second operation unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate effect state side and maintained.

  Further, for example, when the drive motor 731 is driven and controlled from the extended state of the second operation unit 700 and the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is used. However, if the intermediate effect state is passed downward, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance, so that it is possible to easily prevent a downward displacement larger than that in the intermediate effect state. Even after the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop, the second operation unit 700 can be moved to the intermediate effect state side by applying the urging force of the coil spring CS2.

  Here, the effect | action by displacing to the front-back direction with a raising / lowering displacement is demonstrated about the raising / lowering inversion production apparatus 770. FIG. As a premise, there is known a movable accessory that can be switched between a state in which it is displaced in and out of a frame bordered by a center frame 86 and attracts the player's attention and a state in which it is retracted from the player's view.

  Most of such movable accessories are designed with an emphasis on appearance when placed inside the center frame 86, and in the state of being retracted outside the center frame 86, attention from the player In many cases, the appearance was not considered under the assumption that it was not done.

  However, recently, the front-rear distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 has been configured to be long, and at the end of the field of view that passes through the center frame 86 and looks at the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Since the line of sight reaches the rear outer position of the center frame 86 (behind the game area), if the movable accessory in the state of being retracted to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 is not good, There is a possibility of reducing interest.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, not only the front side of the covering member 787 (first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) but also the back side (second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and upper and lower surfaces (FIG. 52). In the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2), the direction of displacement of the up-and-down inversion effect device 770 is set so that the player side (front side) is the base end toward the back side. The direction of displacement along the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's field of view is such that each decorative surface can easily fit in the player's field of view. It is composed.

  Thereby, each decorative surface of the covering member 787 can be easily put into the player's field of view. Although details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, the front side surface (the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, which is visible to the player in the extended state (see FIG. 54), FIG. 54, the first main decorative surface 787a1) and the upper side surface (first sub decorative surface 787a2 or second sub decorative surface 787b2, which is visible to the player in the production standby state (see FIG. 52), in FIG. 52, the first sub decorative surface 787a1). The decorative surface 787a2) and the decoration (a figure, a pattern, a character, a picture, etc.) formed in are formed as a mutually related decoration.

  In other words, the first main decoration surface 787a1 and the first sub decoration surface 787a2 are formed as a first decoration associated with each other, and the second main decoration surface 787b1 and the second sub decoration surface 787b2 are associated with each other. The first decoration and the second decoration are formed as different decorations.

  The decoration formed on the upper surface is arranged in the front-rear gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 26) arranged on the back side in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700. Therefore, the state where attention is paid to the sphere flowing down the game area formed outside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) and the state where attention is paid to the display effect developed on the third symbol display device 81 are switched. It is easy for the player to enter the field of view when moving his eyes.

  Therefore, the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, “chance” or “hit”) that the player can visually recognize through the covering member 787 in the overhanging state are displayed on the covering member 787 even in the production standby state. It can be made visible to the player through the side.

  Thus, the player can keep the player's attention continuously gathered on the covering member 787 that is displaced so as to be inconspicuous so that the third symbol display device 81 can be easily viewed.

  Further, as will be described later, since the covering member 787 is configured to be able to be rotationally displaced so as to switch the decorative surface directed toward the player, the contents of the decorative surface that can be visually recognized by the player in the extended state are different. A case can occur.

  For example, before the player confirms the appearance of the covering member 787 in the overhanging state, the up-and-down / inversion effect device 770 is placed in the effect standby state (when missed or when the operation speed is excessively high), If the contents of the decorative surface can only be grasped from the side, most of the front side is hidden by the game board 13 in the production standby state, so that the player is developed on the display surface of the 3rd symbol display device 81. Attention must be paid to the liquid crystal effect, and the attention to the covering member 787 is reduced.

  On the other hand, when adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be grasped from the upper side as in the present embodiment, the player can visually recognize the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 in the effect standby state, It is possible to grasp the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, “chance” or “hit”) that the player can visually recognize through the installation member 787.

  Thus, for the player who missed the appearance of the covering member 787 in the overhanging state, the contents notified by the state of the covering member 787 are displayed on the decorative surface that can be seen by the covering member 787 even in the production standby state. Notification can be continued. Thereby, the attention of the covering member 787 can be kept high regardless of each state such as the production standby state or the overhanging state.

  In the present embodiment, the displacement in the front-rear direction of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 enters forward from the rear end surface of the game area from the state arranged on the back side of the rear end surface of the game area. The configuration as such a displacement will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 52, in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700, the front surface of the covering member 787 and the plate back surface of the center frame 86 are opposed to each other, and the center frame 86 is on the covering member 787 side. A flow path forming portion 86a is provided so as to project.

  The flow path forming portion 86 a is configured such that a ball that jumps into a warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 from the left and right inlets of the center frame 86 reaches the lower edge of the center frame 86, and then The rear side portion of the guide flow path for guiding the ball that has flowed down the lower rolling surface of the frame 86 to the first winning port 64 disposed in the game area by once swinging backward and flowing forward again. (See FIG. 9). That is, the rear end face BE1 of the game area is arranged behind the front face of the base board 60 (see FIG. 2) by the flow path forming portion 86a.

  Since the sphere that has flowed down the flow path forming portion 86a enters the first winning port 64 with a high probability, the attention to the flow path forming portion 86a is high, especially when the sphere jumps into the center frame 86. The player's line of sight is likely to gather at the flow path forming portion 86a. In the production standby state (see FIG. 52), since the production device 780 is disposed directly behind the flow path forming portion 86a, it is easy to configure a state where the production device 780 in the production standby state enters the player's field of view. Can do.

  In the production standby state of the second motion unit 700, the covering member 787 is disposed on the back side of the rear end face BE1 (see FIG. 52A), and in the intermediate performance state of the second motion unit 700, the covering member 787 is arranged. The front surface portion is disposed on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53A), and the front surface portion of the covering member 787 is disposed on the front side of the rear end surface BE1 in the extended state of the second operation unit 700.

  That is, the covering member 787 is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86, and at the same time, is displaced toward the front side so as to enter the same front-rear position as the front-rear position of the game area. Therefore, it can be shown to the player that the covering member 787 has moved on the center frame 86 and moved to the front side (approaching the player side).

  In the second motion unit 700, when the effect device 780 is displaced in the front-rear direction in accordance with the up-and-down displacement, the front-rear position of the front end surface is the second decoration in the projecting state of the first operation unit 600 in the projecting state. The rotary member 660 is configured to match (coincide with) the front-rear position of the second effect surface 661b.

  Thereby, the front-rear position of the second effect surface 661b (see FIG. 29) of the first motion unit 600 and the effect device 780 (FIG. 30) of the second motion unit 700, which are arranged close to each other in front view in the overhang state. Therefore, these can be easily visually recognized.

  On the other hand, since the arrangement in the front-rear direction of the effect device 780 is lower in the intermediate effect state and the effect standby state than the position in the extended state, the box-shaped member of the first operation unit 600 is compared to the extended state. 661 and the rendering device 780 can be separated (independently) so as to be easily viewed.

  The up-and-down reversal effect device 770 includes a main body member 771 connected to and supported by the elevating plate member 740, and an effect device 780 configured to be displaceable with respect to the main body member 771. Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, the details of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 will be described.

  55 is an exploded front perspective view of the up / down reversal effect device 770, and FIG. 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the up / down reversion effect device 770. In the description of FIGS. 55 and 56, FIGS. 50 and 51 are referred to as appropriate.

  The main body member 771 includes a lower elongate portion 772 that is elongated in the left-right direction, and an insertion cylindrical portion 773 that projects in a cylindrical shape from the left and right center position of the lower elongate portion 772 toward the back side. The lower elongated portion 772 is integrally formed with a pair of guide extending portions 774 extending from the left and right ends of the lower elongated portion 772 to the back side and a connecting portion extending vertically to the left and right central portions of the lower elongated portion 772. An upper elongate portion 775 that is elongated in the left-right direction, and a linear motion plate member 784 of the rendering device 780 that is disposed on the back side from the left and right sides of the upper elongate portion 775 can be guided in the left-right direction. A plurality of guide portions 776, a transmission device holding plate 777 fastened and fixed from the rear side to the left and right center of the upper long portion 775, a lower long portion 772 and an upper long portion. Light emitting effect means 778 fastened and fixed to the front side of the portion 775; Provided.

  The insertion cylindrical portion 773 is a portion that is inserted into the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 744 of the elevating plate member 740, and is formed in a dimensional relationship that can slide on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 744. The member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction. That is, by inserting the insertion cylindrical portion 773 through the cylindrical portion 744, it is possible to suppress tilting displacement in the front-rear direction of the main body member 771 with respect to the lifting plate member 740.

  The guide extending portion 774 is longer than the vertical plate 774a whose width is directed in the vertical direction, the first horizontal plate 774b which is connected to the upper end portion of the vertical plate 774a and whose width direction is directed in the horizontal direction, and the first horizontal plate 774b. A second horizontal plate 774c that is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side and faces in the left-right direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), and protrudes from the left and right outer surfaces of the vertical plate 774a toward the left and right outer sides. A pair of upper and lower cylindrical portions 774d provided, and a rotating cylindrical portion 774e that is rotatably supported by the cylindrical portion 774d.

  The width of the second horizontal plate 774c is increased in such a manner that the second horizontal plate 774c extends inward in the left and right direction from the widthwise end of the first horizontal plate 774b. The expanded portion in the width direction is disposed so as to face the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740 in the up-down direction in the assembled state, and is brought into contact with each other, thereby suppressing the tilt displacement in which the guide extension portion 774 is tilted forward. That is, by tilting the second horizontal plate 774c so as to be opposed to the lower bottom portion of the lifting plate member 740 in the vertical direction, the body member 771 is tilted and displaced forward with respect to the lifting plate member 740 as a reference. Can be suppressed.

  A pair of cylindrical portions 774d are not arranged in the vertical direction, but the upper cylindrical portion 774d is shifted to the front side as compared with the lower cylindrical portion 774d. This deviation is set so that the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical portions 774d are parallel to each other (see FIG. 52A). That is, by arranging the pair of cylindrical portions 774d in parallel with the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e are simultaneously applied to the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762. Can be touched. Thereby, a pair of upper and lower rotating cylinder parts 774e can be rolled stably, and it can be made easy to avoid that a local load arises.

  The guide portion 776 is fastened and fixed so as to connect the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a arranged on the left and right sides and formed with female threads on the inner peripheral side, and the pair of left and right cylindrical portions 776a in a manner in which a pair of left and right are arranged vertically. A plurality of dropout prevention plate portions 776b.

  The drop-off prevention plate portion 776b includes an insertion hole drilled at a position corresponding to the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a, and a fastening screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole is screwed into the cylindrical portion 776a. This is a portion that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical portion 776a and functions as a portion for preventing the linear motion plate member 784 from falling off, details of which will be described later.

  The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b formed in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position where the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, A cylindrical projecting portion 777c projecting in a cylindrical shape on the front side below the insertion hole 777b, a pair of insertion holes 777d drilled so that a fastening screw can be inserted at both upper and lower end positions, and fastened on the back side A fixed wiring member 777e.

  The cylindrical projecting portion 777c has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and the fastening screw is screwed in a state of being inserted into the transmission gear 781b, so that the upside down member 781 is pivotally supported so as not to fall off. Part.

  The insertion hole 777d allows a fastening screw to be screwed into a female screw portion 775a formed in a corresponding portion of the upper long portion 775 to be inserted, and the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into the upper long portion 775 by the fastening screw. Fastened and fixed to.

  The wiring fastening member 777e is a part for holding and fastening the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in the gap between the transmission device holding plate 777, but has a shape along the outer frame of the transmission device holding plate 777. As a result, the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777 can be improved.

  The light emitting effecting means 778 is composed of two upper and lower electric decoration boards 778a having light emitting members such as LEDs arranged on the front side, and light transmission arranged on the front side of the electric decoration board 778a. A light diffusing member 778b formed by a light diffusing process.

  The upper electric circuit board 778a includes detection sensors 778d arranged in a pair of upper and lower sides on the back side. The detection sensor 778d is a photocoupler type detection device, and is configured to be able to detect the posture of the upside down member 781 of the effect device 780 by disposing an arcuate projecting portion 781d in the detection groove. Will be described later.

  The lower light diffusing member 778b is formed with a plurality of fastened portions on the back side, and the fastened portion is inserted from the back side into an insertion hole formed in the lower elongated portion 772 at a corresponding position. The fastening screw is not conspicuous by being fastened and fixed by being screwed.

  On the other hand, the upper light diffusion member 778b is formed with insertion holes 778c for inserting fastening screws on both the left and right sides, and the fastening screws inserted from the front side into the insertion holes 778c are female screws of the upper elongated portion 775. The upper light diffusion member 778b is fastened and fixed by being screwed into the portion 775b.

  In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side and may become noticeable without countermeasures. However, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is always on the front side of the insertion hole 778c as described later. Therefore, the head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787.

  For this reason, even if the design is such that the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, it is possible to avoid a situation where the head of the fastening screw is conspicuous and adversely affect production. In other words, by designing the covering member 787 so as to conceal the fastening screw, the degree of freedom in designing the insertion direction of the fastening screw can be increased.

  The rendering device 780 is a device that is configured to be displaceable by arranging an outer portion around the upper elongated portion 775, and is an upside down member 781 that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777. And a driving motor 782 for driving the driving gear 782a for transmitting the driving force to the transmission gear 781b of the upside down member 781 and one end on each of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the upside down member 781. A pair of intermediate arm members 783 that are pivotally supported, a pair of linear plate members 784 that are pivotally supported at the other end of the intermediate arm member 783 and that are guided by the guide portion 776 in the left-right direction, A pair of shaft rotating members 785 arranged between a linear motion plate member 784 and an intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversed) by a rotational shaft extending in the left-right direction, and the shaft rotational member 785 is a linear motion plate. Joint support with member 784 A pair of shaft support members 786, a pair of end plate members 785d fitted and fixed so as not to fall off in a state where the phase is fixed to the left and right outer ends of the shaft rotation member 785, and front and rear of the end plate members 785d. And a covering member 787 that is formed with a left and right length that covers the left and right side portions of the upper long portion 775.

  The upside down member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b protruding in a gear shape on the back side of the center portion of the main body plate portion 781a, and the length of the main body plate portion 781a. A pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c projecting in a cylindrical shape from both ends of the scale direction to the back side, and projecting from the front side of the main body plate portion 781a in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b. Arc-shaped projecting portion 781d.

  The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole extending in the front-rear direction at the center, the cylindrical projecting portion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into the circular hole, and a fastening screw is screwed from the tip side. The upside down member 781 is pivotally supported by the transmission device holding plate 777 through the transmission gear 781b so as not to fall off.

  The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a. When the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the upside down member 781. That is, the upside down member 781 can be driven to rotate by energizing the drive motor 782.

  The cylindrical projecting portion 781c pivotally supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end where the one side support hole 783a of the intermediate arm member 783 is formed is displaced following the cylindrical projecting portion 781c which is displaced as the upside down member 781 is rotationally displaced.

  The arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is formed so as to be disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light emission effect means 778. That is, the arcuate projecting portion 781d can be disposed on either of the upper and lower pair of detection sensors 778d.

  Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the posture of the upside down member 781 is changed between two postures in which the arcuate projecting portion 781d is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and a posture therebetween (a pair of detection sensors 778d). The posture in which the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is not arranged in both of the detection grooves) can be determined.

  The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in a long rod shape (narrow plate shape), and has a one-side support hole 783a drilled at one end and pivotally supported by a cylindrical projecting portion 781c. A cylindrical other side cylindrical portion 783b whose inner peripheral side is formed through the other end, which is the opposite side of the support hole 783a, and an umbrella-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other side cylindrical portion 783b. ) Formed as a bevel tooth portion 783c.

  A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c, and a fastening screw inserted from the back side into the one side support hole 783a is screwed into the female screw. Accordingly, the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the upside down member 781 so as not to drop off.

  The linear motion plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape elongated in the left-right direction, and a cylindrical projecting portion 784a projecting in a cylindrical shape that is inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783; An arcuate plate portion 784b projecting in an arc shape around the central axis of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a, and an ellipse extending in parallel in the left-right direction on both upper and lower sides of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a A pair of long hole portions 784c, a pair of upper and lower support plate portions 784d arranged in parallel at the position between the long hole portions 784c and projecting on the back side, and an intermediate portion of the support plate portion 784d A pair of ridges 784e formed as ridges protruding on opposite sides and extending in the front-rear direction, and an inner peripheral side disposed in a cylindrical shape opened to the back side at the end of the support plate 784d A pair of fastened portions 784f in which a female screw is formed on Ring holding having a semicircular surface capable of holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e between the shaft support member 786 and the arrangement hole 784g formed through the cylindrical projecting portion 784a and the support plate portion 784d. And a magnet holding half 784i formed in a square box shape so that the magnet Mg can be held between the half 784h and the shaft support member 786.

  The cylindrical projecting portion 784a is formed with an outer peripheral diameter slightly shorter than the inner peripheral diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, and a projecting length slightly longer than the axial length of the other cylindrical portion 783b. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side. That is, the intermediate arm member 783 cannot be removed from the cylindrical projecting portion 784a by the fastening screw inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b from the back side being screwed into the female screw of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a. Is pivotally supported.

  The arcuate plate portion 784b is formed in an arc shape having an inner peripheral diameter slightly longer than the outer peripheral diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b. Accordingly, the arcuate plate portion 784b is disposed close to the other cylindrical portion 783b in the assembled state so as to face the other cylindrical portion 783b in the radial direction, and the tilt displacement of the other cylindrical portion 783b with respect to the rotation axis is limited. Thereby, the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 around the other cylindrical portion 783b can be stabilized.

  The long hole portion 784c is an opening through which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and is fastened to be inserted into the insertion hole of the drop-off prevention plate portion 776b from the back side through the female screw formed in the cylindrical portion 776a. When the screw is screwed in, the linear motion plate member 784 is supported by the main body member 771 so as not to fall off.

  In the support state (assembled state), the linear motion plate member 784 is slidable along the direction in which the long hole portion 784c is formed. That is, the linear motion plate member 784 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction.

  The support plate portion 784d is a plate-like portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotating member 785 so as to suppress vertical displacement, and the protrusion 784e is for defining the horizontal arrangement of the metal rod 785a. The details will be described later.

  The arrangement hole 784g is an opening for avoiding interference between the shaft rotating member 785 and the bevel tooth member 785c, and will be described in detail later.

  The shaft rotation member 785 is a member that is disposed in a pair on the left and right and is pivotally supported by the linear motion plate member 784. The metal rod 785a is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape from a metal material, and the length of the metal rod 785a. A recessed groove portion 785b formed in the circumferential direction at a central position in the direction, and a member disposed at the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, and a bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 A bevel tooth member 785c formed with a bevel tooth (bevel gear) to be engaged, an end plate member 785d disposed at the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, and the end plate member 785d A ring-shaped metal member 785e disposed in a manner raised from the end plate member 785d around the metal rod 785a, and a female screw formed inside and projecting from the left and right inner portions of the end plate member 785d Metal Di is and a rotational position stabilizing portion 785f that is screwed into the fixed.

  The metal rod 785a is disposed between the pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear motion plate member 784, and the protruding portion 784e is disposed in the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured in a dimensional relationship that enables sliding with the ridge portion 784e, and is configured in a dimensional relationship in which displacement in the left-right direction with respect to the ridge portion 784e is restricted.

  That is, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set slightly longer than the left and right widths of the protruding portion 784e, and the diameter of the groove deep portion of the recessed groove portion 785b is set shorter than the gap length between the protruding portions 784e. The diameter of the portion where the groove 785b is not formed is set longer than the gap length between the protrusions 784e.

  As a result, the metal rod 785a can be supported on the back side of the linear motion plate member 784 in such a manner that the shaft can rotate and the displacement in the left-right direction is suppressed.

  The bevel tooth member 785 c is arranged so as to enter the arrangement hole 784 g of the linear motion plate member 784. In a state where the umbrella tooth member 785c partially enters the arrangement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 engages the umbrella tooth portion 783c with the umbrella tooth member 785c from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784. Assembled into.

  In this assembled state, the bevel tooth member 785c is inserted into the placement hole 784g, but the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear plate member 784, so that it cannot be dropped to the front side. The displacement toward the back side is regulated by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the bevel tooth member 785c is supported by the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so as not to drop off.

  The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed in an inner peripheral shape corresponding to a non-circular shape (for example, a D-shaped cross-sectional shape) as a tip portion of the metal rod 785a, and the inner peripheral shape and the metal rod 785a. Is formed and fixed in a dimensional relationship with an interference fit.

  The method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, it may be a method of fixing using an adhesive or the like, or by forming a female screw at the tip of the metal rod 785a and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the end plate member 785d into the female screw, The end plate member 785d may be fastened and fixed to the metal rod 785a, or other methods may be used.

  The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted into the ring holding half 784h of the linear motion plate member 784. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held, and the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d that supports the metal rod 785a is in sliding contact with the inner peripheral side of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, so that the center of rotation of the end plate member 785d is achieved. Can easily coincide with the axis passing through the rotation center of the bevel tooth member 785c, and the load generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a can be reduced.

  The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f functions as a portion where the metal screw to be disposed is attracted to the magnet Mg.

  The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in the shape of a square plate, and has an insertion hole 786a that can be inserted through a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 784f, and a ring holding of the linear motion plate member 784. The magnet Mg can be held between the ring holding half 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e between the half 784h and the magnet holding half 784i of the linear plate member 784. A magnet holding half 786c formed in a rectangular box shape.

  When a fastening screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole 786a is screwed into the fastened portion 784f and the linear plate member 784 and the shaft support member 786 are assembled, the back side of the metal rod 785a is attached to the plate portion of the shaft support member 786. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i and 786c.

  The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed in a box shape in which the left and right inner sides are opened in a pair of front and rear, and is fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the shaft rotating member 785, and is different on the opposite side surface. A decoration composed of a figure, a pattern, a character, a picture, or the like that can be read in a meaning is formed.

  That is, the covering member 787 includes a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface visually recognized by the player in the overhang state (see FIG. 54), a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the back surface thereof, When the first main decorative surface 787a1 is placed in the production standby state (see FIG. 52) with the first main decorative surface 787a1 disposed on the front side, a first sub decorative surface 787a2 formed on the side visible to the player and the back surface And a second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 to be formed. Note that the second sub decorative surface 787b2 is formed on the side that can be visually recognized by the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is placed in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52) with the second main decorative surface 787b1 disposed on the front side.

  The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members that are formed of two front and rear members that are fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d, and are formed in a substantially box shape with the left and right inner sides opened in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). And a plurality of extending portions 787c extending toward the left and right members, and a recessed portion 787d recessed so as to retreat to the left and right outside at a portion between the extending portions 787c. .

  The extending portion 787c is formed such that the end portions thereof are in contact with or in close proximity to each other in the close arrangement state of the covering member 787 (see FIG. 26). Thereby, the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized integrally.

  The recessed portion 787d is a circular portion disposed at the center of the light diffusing member 778b of the light emitting effecting means 778 or the upper left and right centers of the upper elongated portion 775 in the proximity arrangement state of the covering member 787 (see FIG. 26). The circular arc plate portion or the like is a portion that is opened so as to be visible, and is formed in a concave shape so as to avoid interference with these portions.

  The covering member 787 has a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front side and the first sub decorative surface 787a2 faces the upper side (see FIGS. 29 and 52) and the second main surface in accordance with the operation of the rendering device 780. The state can be switched between a state in which the decorative surface 787b1 is directed to the front side and the second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 is directed upward (see FIG. 30). First, a mechanism that constitutes a displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

  FIGS. 57A and 57B are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785. FIG. FIG. 57A illustrates a vertically disposed state (also referred to as an upright vertically disposed state) of the upside down member 781 in which the pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c are disposed on the same vertical line, and FIG. ) Illustrates a state in which the upside down member 781 is rotated about 24 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57A around the cylindrical protruding portion 777c. 57A and 57B, illustration of the end plate member 785d of the left shaft rotation member 785 and the right shaft rotation member 785 is omitted for easy understanding.

  In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is arranged in a state of entering the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). Further, in the inverted vertical arrangement state in which the upside down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from the upright vertical arrangement state, the arcuate projecting portion 781d is arranged in a state of entering the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d. The

  That is, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured so that the upside down member 781 is switched between an upright vertical arrangement state and an inverted vertical arrangement state, and the sound lamp control is performed from the output of the detection sensor 778d. The device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of the rendering device 780.

  As shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B, when the upside down member 781 is rotationally displaced, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the left-right direction while changing its posture. The angle of the posture change corresponds to (proportional to) the rotation angle of the shaft rotation member 785, and the lateral displacement amount of the other cylindrical portion 783b is the lateral displacement amount of the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotation member 785. Corresponding to

  Here, the order in which the rotational displacement and the lateral displacement (linear displacement) occur will be described. These displacements do not occur at the same level at the same time, and there are an arrangement in which the degree of rotational displacement is greater, an arrangement in which the degree of linear displacement is greater, and the like.

  First, the outline will be described. The configurations of the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear plate member 784 are known slider crank mechanisms. That is, when the upside down member 781 rotates around the cylindrical projecting portion 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 781c of the upside down member 781 is moved to the front. The direction of displacement of the linear plate member 784 connected to the other cylindrical portion 783b is regulated so as to translate along the movement axis HL1 passing through the central portion of the cylindrical protruding portion 777c. The pair of left and right linear plate members 784 are simultaneously displaced in the left and right reverse directions along the movement axis HL1.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (b), the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction until it rotates about 24 degrees from the vertically arranged state shown in FIG. 57 (a). The length L1 is half the width of the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the lower elongate portion 772 and the upper elongate portion 775 (the length between the left-right center and the left-right width end). As shown.

  Further, due to the state change from FIG. 57 (a) to FIG. 57 (b), the posture change around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise when viewed from the front. The bevel tooth portion 783c is suppressed to an angle that is less than half of 15 degrees that is an angle as an arrangement interval between adjacent teeth.

  Since the bevel tooth member 785c is disposed on the near side of the intermediate arm member 783, load transmission (gear transmission) between the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c is opposite to each other in the front-rear direction, that is, This occurs on the movement axis HL1 in the front view.

  58A is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa of FIG. 58B is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57B.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 (in FIG. 58 (b), the upper portion Is displaced). In FIG. 58B, for ease of understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are shown to overlap each other, and this overlap width is the bevel tooth portion 783c. And the elastic deformation of the gear teeth of the umbrella tooth member 785c.

  When the bevel tooth portion 783c is engaged with the bevel tooth member 785c and the driving force is transmitted, the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced. While the upside down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 57A, the right shaft rotating member 785 rotates in the reverse direction, and the left shaft rotating member 785 is moved forward. Rotate in the rolling direction.

  While the upside down member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees around the other cylindrical portion 783b, and accordingly, the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 is Rotate 180 degrees. That is, the angle at which the bevel tooth member 785c rotates about the metal rod 785a is configured to be twice the rotation angle about the other cylindrical portion 783b of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

  Here, the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that may be caused by the pressing due to the displacement from the state of FIG. 58 (a) to the state of FIG. 58 (b) is less than the circumferential thickness of the gear teeth, and the bevel tooth member. The amount of the gear teeth of 785c is not surely rotated. That is, the amount of displacement until the abutting representative tooth rotates to the arrangement of the adjacent tooth (the gear tooth of the umbrella tooth member 785c is arranged in 12 equal parts, the displacement required for the rotation of 30 degrees angle Less than (quantity).

  The gear teeth of the umbrella tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the umbrella tooth member 785c. However, in this embodiment, the intermediate arm member 783 and the umbrella tooth member 785c are formed of a resin material. As the accompanying displacement is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, the posture of the shaft rotation member 785 in the rotation direction of the bevel tooth member 785c is changed from the state of FIG. 57 (a) to FIG. 57 (b). ) Is maintained.

  The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c is the rotational position stabilization portion 785f of the shaft rotation member 785 from the magnet Mg with respect to the driving force transmitted to the intermediate arm member 783 via the upside down member 781. This is caused by the opposing adsorption force generated in FIG. 54).

  That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts so as to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilizing portion 785f so as to restrict the right shaft rotating member 785 from being rotationally displaced in the backward rotation direction. The right shaft rotation member 785 receives a forward biasing force from the magnet Mg. Accordingly, the attracting force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction to increase the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785.

  Further, with respect to the left shaft rotating member 785, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is disposed on the front side of the end plate member 785d as in the right side, while the magnet Mg is disposed on the upper side opposite to the right side. (See FIG. 55). For this reason, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts so as to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilizing portion 785f, so that the left shaft rotating member 785 receives a biasing force in the backward direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attracting force of the magnet Mg acts in the direction of increasing the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left shaft rotating member 785.

  In the present embodiment, the attracting force of the magnet Mg is the driving force applied to the umbrella member 785c from the state shown in FIG. 57A until the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced by the length L1 in the left-right direction. It is designed to be able to generate loads exceeding.

  Thereby, the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are elastically deformed so as to absorb the displacement amount of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. When the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57 (b), the bevel tooth member 785c rotates beyond the attractive force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg and the metal screw of the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f When the arrangement is separated, the magnetic force is extremely reduced, and the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c released from the attractive force of the magnet Mg are rotationally displaced while elastically recovering.

  Therefore, at the start of rotation, the elastic recovery amount increases the momentum in the rotation direction of the shaft rotation member 785, so that the rotation speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously improved. This improvement in rotational speed occurs not only in the shaft rotating member 785 but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) fastened and fixed to the shaft rotating member 785.

  Accordingly, since the operation of the covering member 787 can be moderated without changing the driving speed of the drive motor 782, the effect of the covering member 787 can be reduced while reducing the control design burden of the drive motor 782. The effect can be improved.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 is caused by the attractive force of the magnet Mg can be delayed from the timing at which the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts to rotate. .

  The rotational position stabilization portion 785f that receives the attracting force of the magnet Mg is composed of a pair of upper and lower portions, and when the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 is facing the front side, one rotational position stabilization portion 785f. Is disposed close to the magnet Mg and receives an attracting force (see FIG. 52B). When the direction is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, the other (FIG. 52B ) Reference (upper side) rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is disposed close to magnet Mg and receives an attractive force.

  In other words, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is at least in the close arrangement state (see FIGS. 29 and 30). It works effectively for the purpose of limiting the rotational displacement of 785. Therefore, in the displacement from the close arrangement state, the effect that the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is delayed by the magnetic force can be generated regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

  That is, between the state shown in FIG. 58 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 58 (b), the degree of linear motion displacement in the left-right direction is larger than the degree of rotational displacement. When the upside down member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise beyond the front view of FIG. 57 (b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction settles down and rotational displacement occurs.

  According to this embodiment, since the slider crank mechanism is employed as described above, the same effect is produced. That is, in the vicinity of the vertically arranged state, the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c is large in the left-right direction and small in the up-down direction, so the displacement in the left-right direction of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation is small. For this reason, the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is large, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 is small.

  On the other hand, as the longitudinal direction of the upside down member 781 is tilted closer to the left and right direction, the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c is smaller in the left and right direction and larger in the up and down direction. The rotation amount is small and the rotation amount is large. Therefore, the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is small, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 is large.

  Accordingly, in the rotation operation of the upside down member 781 that starts from the vertical arrangement state and ends in the vertical arrangement state, first, the degree of lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 increases, and then the degree of rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 increases. The degree of lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is increased again.

  By causing the linear displacement and the rotational displacement in this order, the extending portion 787c of the covering member 787 is connected to the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772. Collisions can be avoided. Next, changes in the appearance of the covering member 787 will be described.

  FIGS. 59A to 59C are front views of the rendering device 780. FIG. 59 (a) to 59 (c), the inversion operation of the up-and-down inversion effect device 770 is illustrated in time series. In FIG. 59A, an effect device 780 in the upright vertically arranged state of the upside down member 781 is illustrated, and in FIG. 59B, an effect device when the upside down member 781 is rotated 90 degrees from the vertically arranged state. 780 is illustrated, and in FIG. 59 (c), the effect device 780 in the vertically arranged state of the upside down member 781 is illustrated.

  The state of the upside down member 781 changes from an upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A) to an inverted vertical arrangement state by rotating 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front. In the inverted vertical arrangement state, the posture of the covering member 787 is inverted by 180 degrees with reference to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59A). As a result, the decorative surface visible to the player is switched (see FIG. 59C).

  When the upside down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees clockwise (opposite direction) when viewed from the inverted vertical arrangement state, it returns to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A). Accordingly, the reversing operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. 59A and FIG. 59C each time the driving motor 782 (see FIG. 56) is driven by reversing the direction so that the upside down member 781 is rotationally displaced by 180 degrees. The state can be repeatedly switched between the states shown in FIG.

  As described above, while the upside down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 57A, the shaft rotating member 785 is rotated 180 degrees by meshing with the bevel tooth portion 783c. To do. Here, from the rotation direction of the bevel tooth portion 783c, the right shaft rotation member 785 rotates in the backward rotation direction, and the left shaft rotation member 785 rotates in the forward rotation direction. That is, the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the pair of shaft rotating members 785 and end plate members 785d arranged on the left and right rotates in the opposite direction.

  Therefore, in the middle position, the right covering member 787 has the second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 facing the front side, and the left covering member 787 has the first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 facing the front side (see FIG. 59B). ).

  Thus, during the rotational displacement of the covering member 787, the first sub decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub decorative surface 787b2) of the left covering member 787 and the first sub decorative surface 787a2 of the right covering member 787 ( Or it can avoid that the 2nd sub decoration surface 787b2) is visually recognized.

  Therefore, the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be deliberately misaligned on the left and right sides, and the content of the decorative surface can be configured to be difficult for the player to recognize. The amount of information that the covering member 787 gives to the player can be reduced.

  Thereby, a player's attention with respect to the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be reduced. In addition, since the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1) when the rotational displacement is stopped, the game is continued until the rotation of the covering member 787 is stopped. An effect that it is easy to maintain the person's line of sight on the covering member 787 can also be achieved.

  The rotational displacement is executed in the extended state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 54). However, the rotational displacement stops, and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the first one). In the state where the two main decorative surfaces 787b1) are aligned, the effect device 780 has risen to the vicinity of the upper and lower center of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 30), and in this state, the first sub decorative surface 787a2 There is a low possibility that attention will be gathered on (or the second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2).

  In particular, when the third motion unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second motion unit 700, the field of view on the first sub decoration surface 787a2 (or the second sub decoration surface 787b2) is the third motion. The unit 800 is blocked.

  On the other hand, when the second operation unit 700 enters the effect standby state (see FIG. 52) and the effect device 780 is arranged below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the first sub decorative surface 787a2 (or The second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2) is easy to enter the player's field of view.

  As described above, in the second motion unit 700, the first sub decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub decorative surface 787b2) is prevented from being seen evenly during the rotational displacement in the overhanging state, or on the player side. It is formed as a side that can be noticed by the player in the stand-by state of production, by preventing the face from being turned.

  As a result, the appearance of the second operation unit 700 can be changed according to the arrangement, so that the performance performance with respect to the cost (occupation of place, burden concealed well) of arranging the second operation unit 700 is excessively lowered. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a state.

  After the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787, the rotational position stabilization portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54B), thereby stabilizing the posture of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787. Can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the metal member that is attracted to the magnet Mg is composed of a metal screw, so that the member cost can be reduced and the maintainability can be improved as compared with the case of designing a dedicated metal member. .

  As described above, since the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by a linear displacement in the left-right direction, the arrangement of the effect device 780 capable of executing the rotational displacement is limited. That is, in the production standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate production state (see FIG. 33) of the second operation unit 700, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member arranged on the left and right are executed by executing rotational displacement. 750, the front support member 760, and decorative members such as the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a fixedly disposed on the front side of the front support member 760 collide with the covering member 787.

  On the other hand, in the extended state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 30), a space is secured in the left-right direction, so that the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 can be executed.

  Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is determined from the output of the detection sensor 713 that the second operation unit 700 is in the overhanging state. It is controlled to be executable on the assumption of. Thereby, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 can be normally generated.

  The extending portions 787c are arranged close to each other in the vertically arranged state of the upside down member 781, and in this state, the extending portions 787c are arranged to face each other in the front and rear directions at the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772. Therefore, when the covering member 787 is rotationally displaced from this arrangement by the rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction, the extending portion 787c collides with a connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772. A malfunction occurs.

  On the other hand, the configuration in which the extending portion 787c is disposed in proximity causes an effect that the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized integrally, and is a configuration that is necessary for production. It is preferable that it can be maintained.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced in advance in the left-right direction by a length L1 before rotational displacement (see FIG. 57). By the linear displacement of the length L1, the extending portion 787c can be retracted from the front and rear positions of the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772, and the extending portion 787c and the upper elongated portion 775 are retracted. And the connection part of the lower elongate portion 772 can be avoided.

  Further, by configuring the rotational displacement in this way, the rotational displacement does not occur (or is limited) at the length L1 while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, and the rotational displacement occurs at the remaining length L2. Therefore, the amount of displacement in the left-right direction during rotation of the covering member 787 can be kept small.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the arrangement of the covering member 787 changes greatly during rotation, the attention of the covering member 787 can be kept low, and the rotational displacement can be made inconspicuous. As the design of the surfaces 787a1 to 787b2, a design ignoring the appearance during rotational displacement can be performed, so that the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

  Note that the timing at which the covering member 787 starts to rotate can be arbitrarily set by designing the attractive force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, for example, even if a design change occurs in which the left and right widths of the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771 are increased, the configuration of the rendering device 780 is the same, but the magnet Mg Is changed to a magnet having a large attraction force, the collision between the connecting portion and the extending portion 787c can be avoided as in the present embodiment.

  As illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 59, the insertion hole 778c is always arranged to be hidden by the covering member 787. Thereby, it can prevent that the fastening screw inserted in the insertion hole 778c is visually recognized by a player, and it can avoid that an effect effect becomes low with a fastening screw.

  In the present embodiment, the decorations (figures, patterns, patterns, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same on the left and right covering members 787. The arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical to the left and right decorations.

  That is, since the insertion hole 778c is a portion through which the fastening screw is inserted, the LED cannot be disposed on the electrical decoration board 787a at that position (see FIG. 55). Moreover, since the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, it is easily visible in the dark during the light emission effect.

  Accordingly, in the left and right decorations, it is desirable to dispose the insertion holes 778c so as to avoid the bright and conspicuous portions. As a result, the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical to the left and right.

  It should be noted that the insertion holes 778c are naturally allowed to be symmetrical. In particular, when the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 have the same decoration on the left and right covering members 787, there is no disadvantage caused by arranging the insertion holes 778c symmetrically, and the electric circuit board The design of 778a can be facilitated.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the present embodiment, the covering member 787 is linearly displaced left and right during the reversing operation of the up / down reversing effect device 770, and the vicinity of the center of the light diffusing member 778b is the extending portion 787c. Even in a state that is not surrounded by, the mechanism parts such as the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784 and the like are hidden so as not to be visually recognized.

  That is, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b disposed on the front side, and the vertical width of the linear motion plate member 784 is the front side. Is designed to fit within the vertical width of the left and right elongated portions of the upper elongated portion 775 disposed in the upper side. Further, the upside down member 781 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the disk portion of the upper elongated portion 775 disposed on the front side, and the intermediate arm member 783 has a displacement locus that fits into the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b. Designed.

  As a result, the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the effect device 780 can be hidden behind the light diffusing member 778b so as to be invisible, thereby reducing the effect of the effect of the effect device 780 during the reversing operation. Can be avoided.

  Returning to FIG. The third operation unit 800 is arranged on the upper side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the effect standby state, and is supported at the distal ends of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the back case 510. The unit is configured to be movable up and down as the lifting arm member 801 is driven in the vertical direction.

  60 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. 60 and 61, the portion constituting the displacement of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated, and the illustration of the decorative members 870 and 880 as decorative portions disposed on the outside is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the third operation unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by the elevating arm member 801, and a fixed cylinder in which the cylindrical portion 821 is fastened and fixed to the center of the held member 810. A member 820, an inner rotating member 830 pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 821 in a state where the cylindrical portion 821 is inserted into the inner peripheral side, and a main body portion 831 in a state where the inner rotating member 830 is inserted into the inner peripheral side. The outer rotating member 840 that is pivotally supported, a plurality of (in this embodiment, five) intermediate arm members 850 that are rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and the held member 810. A drive transmission device 860 for transmitting a driving force that displaces the inner rotation member 830, the outer rotation member 840, and the intermediate arm member 850.

  The held member 810 includes a disk-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated lid member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

  The main body member 811 has a cylindrical fixing portion 812 that is recessed to hold the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 at the center, and has a through-hole through which a fixing fastening screw is inserted and a through-hole through which electric wiring is inserted. A detection sensor 813 that is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with a detection groove facing the side of the outer rotating member 840 that can receive the detected portion 844; a motor holding portion 814 that holds the drive motor 861; A plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 815 projecting on the front side as cylindrical portions that pivotably support the transmission gear 863 and a double cylindrical portion that pivotally supports the load response gear 865 so as not to fall off on the front side. A plurality of double-cylindrical projecting portions 816 that project.

  The perforated lid member 817 includes a circular hole 818 formed in the center portion in the front-rear direction. The circular hole 818 is designed to have a size such that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 project inward from the inner peripheral edge portion when viewed in the opening direction.

  The fixed cylindrical member 820 includes the above-described cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at the front side end of the cylindrical portion 821, and a light emitting means such as an LED on the front side. Disc-shaped electric decoration substrate 823 to be arranged, and translucency formed from a resin material that is transparent in an umbrella shape (or bowl shape) that can cover the electric decoration substrate 823 from the front side A decorative member 824 and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 821 on the circular plate portion 822 side and configured to be slidable with the cylindrical portion 821 are provided.

  The cylindrical portion 821 is formed with a female screw at the tip on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the cylindrical fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female screw, thereby fixing the cylindrical portion 821. The member 820 is fastened and fixed to the held member 810 so as not to rotate.

  The cylindrical portion 821 is formed so as to penetrate in the axial direction on the inner peripheral side, and the electric wiring inserted through the through hole of the tube fixing portion 812 is passed to the front side through this through portion, and is disposed behind the electric decoration substrate 823. Connected to the connector.

  The LED board 823 includes, as LEDs, pentagonal vertices and inner light-emitting portions 823a arranged at a center position equidistant from those vertices, and outer light-emitting portions 823b arranged at 15 positions on the circumference at equal intervals. And comprising. The inner light emitting unit 823a is configured by an LED whose optical axis faces the front side (front), and the outer light emitting unit 823b is configured by an LED whose optical axis faces the radially outer side (diameter direction).

  The outer light emitting portion 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As will be described later, the light emitted from the outer light-emitting portion 823b is applied to the plating portion 871a of the first decorative member 870 disposed in close contact with each other at equal intervals on the circumference. The member 870 is irradiated with light from the three LEDs.

  The outer light emitting portion 823b is fixedly disposed on the electric decoration substrate 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to be rotationally displaced about the center of the circle, but the outer light emitting portion 823b and the first decorative member 870 are coaxial. Are arranged at equal intervals on the circle, so that the light from the same number of LEDs (three in the present embodiment) is always emitted from each first decorative member 870 regardless of the orientation of the first decorative member 870 in the rotational direction. Can be irradiated.

  Thereby, the change of the light quantity of light LD1 irradiated to the 1st decoration member 870 during rotation operation | movement can be suppressed.

  The sliding member 825 is configured such that the inner diameter side portion can slide on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, while the outer diameter side portion can slide on the circular flange-shaped portion 831a of the inner rotating member 830. Formed.

  The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side, and has a cylindrical portion protruding in a cylindrical shape from the inner diameter side end of the flange-shaped portion. Since the diameter is slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, the inner rotation member 830 is slidably fitted therein.

  By interposing the sliding member 825 therebetween, direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 configured to be rotatable around the fixed cylindrical member 820 is prevented. Further, the sliding member 825 is disposed on the side of the circular plate portion 822 of the cylindrical portion 821, and similarly on the side of the circular flange-like portion 831a of the main body portion 831, which is advantageous in terms of strength. The possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 are damaged or deformed by a load generated when the sliding failure occurs (when the displacement resistance becomes unintentionally excessive) can be reduced.

  The inner rotation member 830 has a cylindrical main body part 831 having a circular flange-like part 831a at the front side end part, and a longitudinal direction in the radial direction at a position obtained by dividing the periphery of the main body part 831 into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. A plurality of metal rods 832 fastened and fixed to the circular flange-shaped portion 831a in a lined orientation, and a plurality of metal rods 832 formed so that the metal rods 832 can be inserted and guided by the metal rods 832. The linear motion member 833 and a plurality of rotational members 834 that are rotatably supported on the radially outer portion of the linear motion member 833 are provided.

  The main body portion 831 has a plurality of sliding protrusions extending rearward in a ridge shape with the circular flange-shaped portion 831a as a base end at an intermediate angular position (five places) between the circular flange-shaped portion 831a and the adjacent metal rod 832. A strip 831b and a plurality of recessed portions 831c formed to be recessed at intervals in the circumferential direction at the end opposite to the circular flange-shaped portion 831a.

  The sliding protrusion 831b is a portion configured to be slidable with the inner peripheral curved surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and reduces the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 to reduce contact friction. The projecting tip is formed in a semicircular cross section.

  The sliding protrusion 831b is arranged at an intermediate angular position between the adjacent metal bars 832 as described above, in other words, on the opposite side of the metal bar 832 with respect to the central axis of the outer rotating member 840. The position (position shifted by 180 degrees).

  As a result, in the switching rotation operation described later, the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832, and the load is applied so that the outer rotational member 840 supported by the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward. Even if it receives, since the displacement of the outer side rotation member 840 can be received by the sliding protrusion part 831b, the contact area of the inner circumferential surface of the outer side rotation member 840 and the outer circumferential surface of the inner side rotation member 830 Can be maintained in a low state.

  The recessed portion 831c is a portion into which the transmission protrusion 864a of the central annular gear 864 enters and is disposed, and the transmission protrusion 864a is disposed in the recessed portion 831c, so that relative rotation with each other is impossible. The rotation angle of the central annular gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830 can be matched.

  The linear motion member 833 is arranged with a space so as to be aligned in the linear motion displacement direction, and a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 833a and 833b projecting in a cylindrical shape toward the rear, and the cylindrical projecting portion 833a. , 833b as a reference, a cylindrical cylindrical shaft portion 833c that is formed on the side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 and is inserted into the rotating member 834, and a distal end portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c along the circumferential direction. A recessed groove 833d that is recessed.

  The recessed groove 833d is arranged on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and the projecting portions 873 and 883 of the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 slide. By being fitted externally, it functions as a displacement restricting groove that prevents the rotating member 834 from falling off in the radially outward direction. Details will be described later.

  The rotating member 834 includes a bevel tooth portion 834a formed in the shape of a bevel gear and a plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 834b that project in a cylindrical shape parallel to the linear motion direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed over the entire circumference, but is formed over the 3/4 circumference (about 270 degrees) necessary for the operation.

  The cylindrical projecting portion 834b is formed with a female screw on the inner peripheral side, and the fastening members 870 and 880 are screwed into the fastening members 870 and 880 through the insertion holes 874 and 884. Although it functions to be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, details will be described later.

  The outer rotating member 840 has a cylindrical main body portion 841 and a plurality (in the present embodiment, five) extending radially outward at a position where the periphery of the main body portion 841 is equally divided into five in the circumferential direction. The extending arm portion 842, the gear teeth 843 formed on the outer peripheral side along the circumference of the rear end portion of the main body portion 841, and the diameter of the main body portion 841 in an arrangement capable of entering the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. And a detected portion 844 extending outward.

  The extended arm portion 842 includes a cylindrical portion 842 a extending in parallel with the central axis of the main body portion 841. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 842 a, and the proximal end of the intermediate arm member 850 is provided. The intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported by the extended arm portion 842 so as not to fall off by inserting a fastening screw into the female screw in a state where the cylindrical portion 842a is inserted into the side bar portion 851.

  The gear teeth 843 function so as to switch the presence / absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840 by being disposed so as to be able to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, but details will be described later.

  The intermediate arm member 850 is a long member, and one end side of the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and the other end of the proximal end bar portion 851. A thickened portion 852 that is thickened to the front side on the end side, and a distal-end-side rod portion 853 that extends from the front-side end of the thickened portion 852 in parallel with the longitudinal direction of the proximal-side rod portion 851. , And a rotation transmitting portion 854 formed with gear teeth at the end portion of the distal end side bar portion 853.

  The rotation transmitting portion 854 is a portion that interlocks with the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834, and is a supported hole 854a that is formed in a dimensional relationship that can rotate with the cylindrical protruding portion 833a inserted therethrough. A guide hole 854b, which is a long hole drilled in an arc shape centered on the supported hole 854a and guided through the cylindrical projecting portion 833b, and a bevel gear having the supported hole 854a as a central axis And a bevel tooth portion 854c that forms a bevel gear by meshing with the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834.

  The drive transmission device 860 is supported by a drive motor 861 fastened and fixed to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, and a cylindrical projecting portion 815 so as not to fall off. A plurality of transmission gears 863 that are meshed so as to be able to transmit a driving force via the gear 862, a central annular gear 864 that is meshed with the transmission gear 863, and a front side of the arrangement of the central annular gear 864 A pair of load response gears 865 that are offset and are pivotally supported by the double cylindrical projecting portion 816 so as not to drop off, and are supported by the double cylinder of the double cylindrical projecting portion 816 on the back side of the load response gear 865. A torque limiter 866 whose resistance is variable according to the load in the rotational direction applied to the load response gear 865.

  The central annular gear 864 is formed in an annular shape, and is designed so that the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 can be inserted into the inner peripheral side thereof. A transmission projection 864a projecting from the bottom plate portion to the front side in an arrangement and shape corresponding to the installation portion 831c, and a coaxial double annular shape disposed on the inner diameter side and outer diameter side of the transmission projection portion 864a. A support annular portion 864b protruding from the portion to the front side.

  In the assembled state, the rear end portion of the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 has a dimensional relationship with an intermediate fit in the gap between the support annular portions 864b in a state in which the transmission protrusion 864a is inserted into the recessed portion 831c. Or they are fitted with a tight fit dimension. Thereby, the center ring gear 864 and the inner side rotation member 830 can be rotated integrally.

  Note that the arrangement of the recessed portion 831c and the transmission protrusion 864a is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or may be arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

  If they are equally spaced, the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 can be assembled without considering the posture of the central annular gear 864 if the arrangement of the transmission protrusion 864a and the recessed portion 831c is matched. Can be done. As in this embodiment, when the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetric in the rotational direction (the same at intervals of 72 degrees), the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are the same. Since it is considered that there is little influence due to the shift at the time of assembling, it is effective to set them at equal intervals.

  If the intervals are unequal, the man-hour of assembling after aligning the posture of the central annular gear 864 with respect to the inner rotating member 830 at the time of assembling is increased by one, but the transmission protrusion 864a to the recessed portion 831c is increased. By using the arrangement, the inner rotary member 830 and the central annular gear 864 can be aligned.

  The load response gear 865 is disposed so as to be able to mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840. Since the torque limiter 866 is engaged with the load response gear 865, the load response gear is caused by the magnitude of the rotational resistance between the inner rotation member 830, the central annular gear 864, and the outer rotation member 840. The state where the rotation of 865 is allowed and the state where it is restricted (restricted) are configured to be switched.

  That is, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect and release transmission of driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In this embodiment, a device for transmitting a driving force in one direction (one-way torque limiter) is configured as a set with the transmitting direction reversed, and switching of driving transmission by the torque limiter 866 can be performed in both directions with good responsiveness. It is configured as follows.

  62 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. 62 and 63, the decorative portion of the third operation unit 800 is shown, and the portion for configuring the displacement is not shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the third operation unit 800 is fastened and fixed to the inner rotating member 830 and the cylindrical protruding portion 834b of the inner rotating member 830, and is connected to one of the cylindrical protruding portions 834b. A first decorative member 870 that covers the side surface; and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding portion 834b and covers the cylindrical protruding portion 834b from the opposite side surface of the first decorative member 870. .

  The first decorative member 870 includes a first skeleton portion 871 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding portion 834b, and a first covering portion 875 formed to cover one side of the first skeleton portion 871. .

  The first skeleton portion 871 is plated as a whole, and is configured to easily reflect light.

  The first covering portion 875 is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material on the inside of the frame, and a figure, a pattern, or a character pattern (hereinafter also referred to as “picture pattern”) is drawn on the surface. When the surface is directed to the front side, the player visually recognizes the pattern.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of (five) first covering portions 875 are drawn with independent patterns and the like. Therefore, by changing the first covering portion 875 that emits strong light by the light emission control by the electrical decoration substrate 823, or changing the arrangement of the first covering portion 875, the pattern that attracts the player's attention is different. Can be made.

  For example, from the player's perspective, a display effect that causes the third symbol display device 81 to pay attention to which first covering portion 875 stops on the third symbol display device 81 side is executed at the same time as the inner rotation member 830. Since the first covering portion 875 on the 3rd symbol display device 81 side can be continuously changed along with the rotation, the player can continue for a period until the rotation stops. Can be collected in the first covering portion 875.

  The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeleton portion 881 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding portion 834b, and a second covering portion 885 formed to cover the other side of the second skeleton portion 881. .

  The second skeleton portion 881 includes a holding piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 accommodated in the second covering portion 885 so as not to drop off.

  In the second covering portion 885, a metal screw is screwed and fixed at a position (adjacent position) where the attracting force of the magnet Mg2 accommodated in the adjacent second covering portion 885 is applied. The magnet Mg2 is attracted to the screw so as to ensure the integrity of the second covering portion 885 in the combined state (particularly, the combined state, see FIG. 32).

  The second covering portion 885 has a figure, a pattern, or a character pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as “pattern, etc.”) drawn on the surface. Make it visible.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of (at least two, a maximum of five) second covering portions 885 are combined into a pattern or the like drawn on a plurality (in this embodiment, five) of the second covering portions 885. A pattern or the like is configured so that each of the second covering portions 885 has a circular shape so that the five second covering portions 885 are visually recognized as a “circular body” when viewed from the front. It is decorated so as to constitute a part of the shape.

  Although the pattern etc. drawn on the 2nd covering part 885 are not specifically limited, In this embodiment, the content grasped | ascertained from the 2nd covering part 885 in a continuous united state is the rotation direction of the 2nd decoration member 880. It is designed as a pattern that does not make a big difference even if the arrangement of is different. In other words, the design does not have a clear top, bottom, left, and right, and the design is such that a change in outer shape is not noticeable even when rotated (in the present embodiment, a circular shape).

  Therefore, the performance performance when the player can visually recognize the second covering portion 885 can be improved if the plurality of second covering portions 885 can be firmly integrated. In this respect, in this embodiment, the second covering portion 885 side is firmly integrated by the attracting force of the magnet Mg2 in the combined state, and therefore the combined state when the second covering portion 885 is disposed on the front side. The performance in the state can be improved.

  In each second covering portion 885, the magnet Mg2 is disposed on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the opposite side. When the orientation of the second covering portion 885 is reversed in the front-rear direction by a switching rotation operation described later, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in the front view is also reversed accordingly.

  Even in this case, the metal screw attracted by each magnet Mg2 is merely replaced with the metal screw screwed and fixed to the second covering portion 885 provided adjacent to the opposite side, and the five second covering portions are provided. Since the portion 885 is arranged in an annular shape, there is no change in the degree of adsorption when integrated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first covering portion 875 does not contain a magnet. As a result, the strength of integration on the first covering portion 875 side is slightly weakened, but this prevents the performance performance from deteriorating.

  That is, since the first covering portion 875 has independent patterns and the like, even if the degree of integration in the combined state is weak and the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 may be slightly shifted, There is no possibility that it will not be possible to recognize a pattern or the like that is visually recognized by a person. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a reduction in performance performance of effects using a pattern or the like drawn on the first covering portion 875.

  Furthermore, since the strength of integration on the first covering portion 875 side is weakened, vibrations caused by up-and-down displacement (stop from) and rotation displacement (stop from) as integral rotation operation and switching rotation operation ), The arrangement of the first covering portions 875 combined can be shifted. As a result, the first covering portion 875 can be displaced in a displacement manner that cannot be realized by a conventional machine configured with a single circular member instead of the first covering portion 875. The production effect of the production by the covering unit 875 can be improved.

  From the above situation, in the combined state in which the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are closely arranged, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces the front side is also referred to as an individual combined state (see FIG. 31), and the second decorative member 880 is the front side. Is also referred to as a series of combined states (see FIG. 32). Next, an operation for switching between the individual merged state and the series merged state will be described.

  64 (a), 64 (b), 65 (a) and 65 (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 66 (a) and FIG. 66 (b). 67 (a) and 67 (b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. FIG.

  In FIGS. 64 to 67, the driving force of the driving motor 861 (see FIG. 60) is transmitted, and the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced by the inner rotating member 830 rotating relative to the outer rotating member 840. Are illustrated in time series.

  That is, it is illustrated in time series in the rear view and the front view, and the state where the inner rotating member 830 rotates 45 degrees from the individual united state (FIGS. 64A and 66A) is illustrated. .

  In FIGS. 64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is described as a virtual position line 832F, and the change in the arrangement of the virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830. In addition, the rotation angle of the inner side rotation member 830 from an individual united state (FIG. 64 (a), FIG. 66 (a)) is illustrated by angle (theta) 31.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotation member 830 rotates counterclockwise from the individual united state (see FIG. 66) (this rotation operation is also referred to as “switching rotation operation” below). Since the rotation of the arm member 850 is permitted, relative rotation of the inner rotation member 830 with respect to the outer rotation member 840 is permitted. In this embodiment, the arrangement of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

  Accordingly, in FIGS. 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced about the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

  From the configuration between the above-described members, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and the cylindrical projecting portion 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a. The change in the arrangement of the supported hole 854a corresponds to the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 833.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the rotation transmitting portion 854 is displaced in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and simultaneously displaced in the circumferential direction, so that the rotation supported by the rotation transmitting portion 854 is supported. Similarly, the member 834 is displaced in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and simultaneously displaced in the circumferential direction. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is displaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction while accompanying a radial displacement.

  Since the switching rotation operation includes a displacement in the circumferential direction, the arrangement of the linear motion member 833, the rotation member 834, and the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed thereto is not fixed even at the radial end position. As compared with the case where the displacement is completed only by the linear motion displacement in the radial direction (for example, the reversal operation described above in the second operation unit 700), the effect of the effect during the switching rotation operation is improved. Can be kept high.

  On the other hand, in the reversing operation described above in the second operation unit 700, a rotational operation with high acceleration using the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58) is generated. The impression that the arrangement of the covering member 787 is fixed at the outer end of the linear movement direction outer displacement (see FIG. 59B) is weakened.

  That is, the rotational speed of the covering member 787 is improved by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation. Even in a situation in which the period near the dead center of the slider crank) continues, the effect of the operation of the covering member 787 is maintained high by increasing the rotational speed of the covering member 787.

  Since the radial rotation is included in the switching rotation operation, a radial load is likely to be generated from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotation member 840, and the rotation axis of the outer rotation member 840 may be displaced. In the embodiment, since the load in the radial direction of the intermediate arm member 850 is similarly generated at equal intervals (72-degree intervals) about the rotation axis, the loads cancel each other. Thereby, since the shift | offset | difference of the rotating shaft of the outer side rotation member 840 can be suppressed, it can be made easy to perform switching rotation operation normally.

  As described above, the radial displacement (enlargement / reduction displacement) in the rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 is caused with the rotation in the circumferential direction. Therefore, in order to avoid a collision with surrounding decorative members, the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 is performed by detecting that the posture of the elevating arm member 801 is that the third operation unit 800 is in the overhanging state. Control is performed so as to be executable in a state determined by the output of the sensor.

  In addition, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 that are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 with the above-described displacement of the rotation transmitting portion 854 are also in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830. Displacement and simultaneously circumferential displacement.

  By rotating and displacing the intermediate arm member 850, the bevel tooth portion 854c (see FIGS. 66 and 67) and the bevel tooth portion 834a (see FIG. 60) of the rotating member 834 are meshed, and the rotating member 834 and the rotating member 834 are rotated. The decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the member 834 are rotationally displaced about the metal rod 832 as an axis.

  The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32 as the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with reference to the virtual position line 832F. The rotation direction increases so that the angle θ32 is away from the virtual position line 832F in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the rotating member 834 is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60). ), Set in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the radially outer side of the virtual position line 832F.

  Since the rotating member 834 is in a posture in which either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side in the integrally rotated state, the maximum angle θ31E (180 in this embodiment) is the maximum value of the angle θ31. When the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 reaches the maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in this embodiment) as a result of the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotation member 834 rotates half a turn (rotates 180 degrees). ).

  That is, the rotation angle of the rotation member 834 about the metal rod 832 is configured to be twice the rotation angle of the bevel tooth portion 854c about the supported hole 854a.

  Here, unlike what was demonstrated as an effect | action of the magnet Mg of the above-mentioned 2nd operation | movement unit 700, the adsorption | suction force of the magnet Mg2 (refer FIG. 62) is the rotational displacement of the decoration members 870 and 880 centering on the metal rod 832. However, it does not cause an effect of delaying rotation.

  That is, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force with the adjacent second decorative member 880, and the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 as the intermediate arm member 850 rotates. As a result, the suction force may be lost due to a gap formed between the second decorative members 880 provided next to each other.

  Therefore, before the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 is started, the attracting force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and the rotation with respect to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 about the metal rod 832 is performed. There is no delay effect.

  Therefore, the driving force required for rotationally displacing the decorative members 870 and 880 can be reduced. That is, since the driving force required for the drive motor 861 can be reduced, the drive motor 861 can be downsized.

  Furthermore, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be started quickly and terminated early, the player's attention to the rotational displacement around the metal rod 832 can be reduced.

  The rapidity at the time of starting the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870 and 880 with respect to the rotational angle of the inner rotational member 830 to be not constant.

  For example, during the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the rotation angle of the virtual position line 832F (the rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830) from the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 has a reduced diameter and can perform an integral rotation operation is 45 degrees. In this case, the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66B), and the angle θ32 when the virtual position line 832F is rotated by an angle of 45 degrees is set to 27 degrees (FIG. 67A). reference).

  That is, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller on the rotation start side of the inner rotation member 830 from the state where the integral rotation operation is possible than in the middle of the rotation. Thereby, the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be suppressed at the start of rotation of the inner rotation member 830.

  The driving force of the drive motor 861 is used for the rotation of the inner rotation member 830, the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, and the rotation of the decoration members 870 and 880. Since the driving force required to rotate the decorative members 870 and 880 at the start of rotation of the inner rotation member 830 from a possible state can be reduced, an excessive load is applied to the drive motor 861 when the rotation of the inner rotation member 830 is started. An increase in size can be avoided.

  Further, the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 centering on the metal rod 832 occurs while being displaced in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, so that the visibility of the decorative members 870 and 880 during the rotational displacement can be kept low. it can. Thereby, the possibility that the side surface portion of the decorative member 870, 880 (for example, the connection surface between the first covering portion 875 and the second covering portion 885) is visually recognized can be reduced, and the decorative member 870, 880 can be reduced. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the side portion of the.

  During the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps with the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 when viewed from the front. Further, the arrangement also overlaps with the extended arm portion 842 provided adjacent to the extended arm portion 842 where the cylindrical portion 842a on which it is supported is disposed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 may collide with the surrounding portion without taking measures.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the collision is avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 back and forth for each part. That is, by disposing the distal end side bar portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 on the rear side rather than the proximal end side rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the proximal end side rod portion 851 and the distal end side The rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 can be overlapped in the front-rear direction, and a collision during the switching rotation operation can be avoided.

  Further, the proximal end side bar portion 851 is disposed on the front side of the extended arm portion 842, and the distal end side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 are disposed on the rear side of the extended arm portion 842, so that the switching rotation operation can be performed. At this time, the intermediate arm member 850 can be disposed before and after the extended arm portion 842, and the collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

  In FIGS. 64 to 67, the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 with respect to the outer rotation member 840 is a direction that allows the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (front counterclockwise direction in the individual combined state, see FIG. 66). ) Was explained. In this case, the gear teeth 843 are engaged with the load response gear 865 that generates resistance via the torque limiter 866 to receive resistance, and the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is limited.

  On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 is the reverse direction described above (clockwise in front view in the individual combined state), or in the direction allowing rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (front counterclockwise in the individual combined state). If rotation continues in the same direction after the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state where the rotation is restricted by rotation in the rotation direction (for example, from the individual combined state to the series combined state), the outer side A load exceeding the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 that restricts the rotation of the rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, and the maintenance of the posture of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are released. And rotate synchronously.

  In other words, in a state where the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted regardless of the rotation direction, when the inner rotation member 830 is driven to rotate in a direction in which the restriction of the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is continued. The inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decorative member 870, and the second decorative member 880 rotate integrally while maintaining the combined state (this rotating operation is referred to as “ Also referred to as “integral rotation operation”).

  The integral rotation operation occurs in a state where the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted. In the present embodiment, the integral rotation operation occurs in a combined state in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are arranged close to each other.

  Therefore, unlike the switching rotation operation in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the diameter expansion direction, there is no need to consider a collision with a surrounding decorative member, so that the third operation unit 800 waits for an effect. The integral rotation operation can be executed in the state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the integral rotation operation is controlled to be executable regardless of the arrangement of the third operation unit 800.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, by the driving force of the single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60), the switching rotation operation accompanied by the radial direction displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880, and the expansion operation are performed. The first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be integrally rotated without any radial displacement, and any operation can be performed in both driving directions, but the operation has priority. Yes, it is not possible to execute any operation immediately in any rotation direction.

  For example, from the state shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a), the switching rotation operation can be executed by rotating the inner rotation member 830 counterclockwise as viewed from the front. Rotation operation can be executed, and it is possible to execute the integral rotation operation by rotating the inner rotation member 830 clockwise in the front view, but immediately, the integral rotation operation is performed in the counterclockwise rotation in the front view. Can not be executed.

  In addition, for example, from the state shown in FIGS. 64A and 66A, after the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state where the rotation is restricted. Thus, when the inner rotation member 830 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view (reverse direction), the switching rotation operation is executed again, and immediately, the integral rotation operation in the clockwise direction in the front view is executed. Can not.

  As described above, the operation mode of the third operation unit 800 of the present embodiment depends on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or allowed with respect to the rotation direction of the drive motor 861. The relative displacement of the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 changes.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) determines whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or allowed for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861. The drive motor 861 can be driven and controlled in an appropriate drive direction from the determination result. Hereinafter, an example of drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described.

  FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the drive mode of the drive motor 861, and the output of the detection sensor 813 in time series. As shown in FIG. 68, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled to alternately repeat the normal effect and the reverse effect as the effect control of the third operation unit 800.

  An operation including a switching rotation operation is executed at the time of an inversion effect, and an operation not including a switching rotation operation is executed at the time of a normal effect. This is to avoid the collision between the decorative members 870 and 880 and the surrounding decorative members in the switching rotation operation.

  For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power failure or when the power is turned on in the morning, the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed after the third operation unit 800 is extended. Then, after grasping the state of the movable part from the output of the detection sensor 813, control is performed so as to execute control during normal performance. Thereby, even when the state of the movable part cannot be grasped from the output result of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on, it is possible to avoid a situation where the decorative members 870 and 880 and the surrounding decorative members collide accidentally. .

  As the drive direction of the drive motor 861, forward rotation and reverse rotation are described. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotary member 830 is rotated clockwise in front view (a drive mode in which the integral rotation operation is immediately executed in the individual combined state (see FIG. 66A)). The reverse rotation at 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotary member 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which the switching rotation operation is immediately executed in the individual combined state).

  First, the drive control at the time of the normal effect before the time of the reverse effect will be described. At the time of this normal performance, the third operation unit 800 is in the individual united state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 is always an integral rotation operation.

  Since the switching rotation operation does not occur, the collision with the surrounding decorative members cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the effect standby state or the overhanging state at an arbitrary timing. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is displaced up and down by the up and down movement of the elevating arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate integrally with the up and down displacement simultaneously. It is controlled so that an action can occur.

  Naturally, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may be integrally rotated in a state where the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801 is fixed, or the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may be rotated. The lifting / lowering arm member 801 may be moved up and down while the integral rotation operation is stopped.

  Since the drive direction of the drive motor 861 is only forward rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the switching of this output is determined. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the posture of the outer rotating member 840 as an initial position, and can set the outer rotating member 840 arbitrarily by setting a plurality of driving times from the initial position. It can be controlled to stop at the posture.

  Next, drive control during the reversal effect will be described. First, at the time of a reversal effect, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third motion unit 800 is in an overhanging state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue normal rotation until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

  When it is determined that the detected portion 844 is entering the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. By the reverse rotation drive, the third operation unit 800 performs the switching rotation operation. During this time, the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, and thus the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. The

  When driving of the drive motor 861 is continued in the rotation direction as it is, a series of combined states is reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are integrally rotated. After the integral rotation operation starts, the outer rotation member 840 also starts to rotate in conjunction with the inner rotation member 830, so that the detected portion 844 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. In other words, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integrated rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has been started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813.

  After the integral rotation operation is started, the drive motor 861 is stopped or only the reverse rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 is always an integral rotation operation. Since the switching rotation operation does not occur, the collision with the surrounding decorative members cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the effect standby state or the overhanging state at an arbitrary timing.

  Since the drive direction of the drive motor 861 is only reverse rotation, every time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched, and the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840.

  When switching from the reversal effect to the normal effect, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced downward in advance, and the third operation unit 800 is in an overhanging state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue the reverse rotation until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

  When it is determined that the detected portion 844 is entering the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in the forward rotation. By the forward rotation driving, the third rotation unit 800 performs the switching rotation operation. During this time, the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. The

  Next, an integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is performed. After the integrated rotation operation starts, the outer rotating member 840 starts rotating, whereby the detected portion 844 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. In other words, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integrated rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has been started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813.

  After the integral rotation operation is started, the process shifts to the normal production again. The restriction on the drive control at the time of the normal effect is the same as the restriction on the drive control described at the time of the normal effect arranged before the above-mentioned reverse effect.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 813 can be used to determine whether to switch the rotation mode of the third operation unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and to determine the rotation angle of the outer rotation member 840. It can also be used for reference determination. Therefore, the required number of detection sensors 813 can be reduced as compared with the case where individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

  As described above, the switching rotation operation can be executed by switching the driving direction of the drive motor 861 from the state in which the integral rotation operation is continued or the rotation is stopped. That is, regardless of the posture of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state, the switching rotation operation can be executed to switch to the continuous combined state.

  Therefore, in the operation effect, in the case where control is performed so as to switch to the continuous coalescence state at the timing of the jackpot notification, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting the jackpot notification from the posture of the first decorative member 870.

  Further, the decoration in the combined state is designed so that the content grasped by the player is not greatly different depending on the arrangement of the second decoration member 880 in the rotation direction as described above. In other words, even if the arrangement of the decorative members 870 and 880 in the rotation direction at the start of the switching rotation operation is different, the content grasped by the player as a continuous coalescence state at the end of the switching rotation operation is the same. can do.

  Therefore, unlike the case where the pattern in the combined state is different in the arrangement in the rotation direction, since the integral rotation operation for adjusting the posture after reaching the combined state can be omitted, the first decorative member in the individual combined state Regardless of the posture of 870, the drive control up to the big hit notification can be made the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, both the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation can be realized by both the normal rotation and the reverse rotation as the driving direction of the drive motor 861. Therefore, compared with the case where the operation mode is fixed between the forward rotation and the reverse rotation, a wide variety of rendering modes can be realized with the single drive motor 861.

  69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit 800 taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. As shown in FIG. 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 penetrates from the rear end portion where the tube fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is disposed to the front end portion where the electric decoration substrate 823 is disposed. The electrical wiring is guided from the rear end portion to the front end portion through this opening, and the terminal is connected to the connector disposed on the electric decoration board 823. Electricity is conducted through this electric wiring, and the LEDs arranged on the electric decoration board 823 are configured to be able to control light emission.

  The light LH1 emitted from the inner light emitting portion 823a of the electrical decoration substrate 823 acts to illuminate the bulging portion 824a that bulges to the front side on the center side of the translucent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a portion that is visible to the player at the center of the circle in which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged on the circumference in the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. To do.

  The light LD1 emitted from the outer light emitting portion 823b of the electric decoration substrate 823 is emitted to the interior of the decorative members 870 and 880 (first decorative member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged on the front side, and the decorative members 870 and 880 It works to shine from the inside.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individual united state (see FIG. 69) in which the decorative member 870 is arranged on the front side and a series united state (see FIG. 32) in which the decorative member 880 is arranged on the front side. Therefore, the case where the decoration member 870 is illuminated by the light LD1 and the case where the decoration member 880 is illuminated can be switched.

  In the individual united state (see FIG. 69), the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plating part 871a subjected to the plating process of the first skeleton part 871, thereby switching the direction of the light LD1 to the front side. Thereby, it can irradiate so that most light LD1 may go to the 1st covering part 875, and the brightness of the 1st covering part 875 at the time of irradiation of light LD1 can be improved favorably.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the electric decoration board 823 is fixedly arranged, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to rotate around the periphery. Therefore, the irradiation direction of the light LD1 and the decorative members 870 and 880 The relationship with the arrangement can be changed by the rotation of the decorative members 870 and 880. For example, during rotation, if the light LD1 is irradiated to the central portion of the plating portion 871a, the light LD1 emitted from the same LED may be irradiated to a position shifted from the central portion of the plating portion 871a. obtain. Therefore, without measures, the brightness of the first covering portion 875 by the light LD1 is easily changed by the rotation of the decoration members 870 and 880, and the decoration members 870 and 880 are integrally rotated while emitting light at a constant brightness. It may be difficult to execute the effect.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the shape of the plating portion 871a configured to reflect the light LD1 is a concave shape, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the electric decoration substrate 823. And the center is designed so that it may be arrange | positioned near the center part of the 1st covering part 875 by front view.

  Since the light LD1 is disposed so that the optical axis is directed in the outer diameter direction of the circle in which the outer light emitting portion 823b is disposed, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plating portion 871a, and thus the center of the radius of curvature thereof. It progresses toward the side, and illuminates the vicinity of the center of each first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870.

  Therefore, a plurality of lights LD1 can be reflected so as to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering portion 875, regardless of the arrangement of the plating portion 871a with respect to the outer light emitting portion 823b. Thereby, since light can be stably irradiated to the vicinity of the center of the front plate portion of the first covering portion 875, the first covering portion 875 can be visually recognized with uniform brightness even during the integral rotation operation. be able to.

  Further, the first skeleton part 871 is a part where the plating process is performed in the same manner as the plating process on the plating part 871a, and an outer plating part 871b arranged outside the first covering part 875 in a front view. Prepare. The light LD1 is reflected by the outer plating portion 871b as well as the plating portion 871a. However, since the outer plating portion 871b is arranged rearward compared to the arrangement of the plating portion 871a, the outer plating portion 871b. The degree of light can be weakened.

  Thereby, the intensity | strength of the light visually recognized outside the 1st covering part 875 is too strong, a player feels dazzling, and the situation which reduces the visibility inside the frame of the 1st covering part 875 is avoided. be able to.

  Although the electrical decoration board | substrate 823 is pinched | interposed into the 1st decoration member 870 and the 2nd decoration member 880 from the front and back, since it is not completely obstruct | occluded in the joint, all the light from the outer side light emission part 823b is the inner side. It is not irradiated.

  First, the internal structure is visible in FIG. 69 between the member edge portion 875a of the first covering portion 875 and the member edge portion 885a of the second covering portion 885 disposed to face the member edge portion 875a. A gap VA1 of a certain degree is formed. Since the outer plating portion 871b protrudes outside the frame of the first covering portion 875 through the gap VA1, the light LD1 having passed through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

  In addition, the member interference with the metal rod 832 is between the member outer end portion 875b of the first covering portion 875 and the member outer end portion 885b of the second covering portion 885, which is opposed to the metal rod 832. A large gap VA2 exceeding the area required for avoiding this is formed.

  First of all, the gap VA2 avoids the collision between the metal bar 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880 so that the length of the metal bar 832 can be sufficiently secured. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring the function of guiding the linear movement displacement of the member 834.

  Second, the gap VA2 is a fastening screw that is inserted into the skeleton portions 871 and 881 and is screwed into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b of the rotating member 834 so that the decorative members 870 and 880 are attached to the rotating member 834. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring an assembly path for fastening screws for fastening and fixing.

  Thirdly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring a passage of light for traveling light that has passed through the transparent portions of the skeleton portions 871 and 881. Since the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light traveling outward through the gap VA travels radially from the center of the circle through equal intervals on the circumference. It is visually recognized as light.

  Therefore, by executing the integral rotation operation of the decorative members 870 and 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can be similarly rotated. Accordingly, light that radiates radially from the rotation center of the third operation unit 800 is made unnecessary to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light emitting unit 823b (for example, while all the lighting is continued). The light emission effect visually recognized in the rotating light emission mode can be executed.

  In the one allied state (see FIG. 32), the second skeleton portion 881 is entirely formed of a light-transmitting resin material, so that the reflection action of the light LD1 by the second skeleton portion 881 is suppressed.

  As a result, it is possible to irradiate the light within the frame of the second covering portion 885 with light (weak light) away from the optical axis in the light LD1, so that the second covering portion 885 emits light. Can be weakened. On the other hand, since the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, the intensity of the light emitted radially from the rotation center of the third operation unit 800 can be improved.

  The frame of the second covering portion 885 is formed of a colored (in this embodiment, an arbitrary color as the color of the circular body) and a light-transmitting resin material, and a light diffusion process is formed inside. The light diffusion decoration portion 885c is disposed over the circumferential direction. Therefore, the light incident on the light diffusion decoration portion 885c in the light LD1 is refracted and acts to cause the entire light diffusion decoration portion 885c to emit light.

  By this surface light emission, it is possible to make the light visible through the light diffusion decoration portion 885c arranged in the circumferential direction uniform, and each light diffusion decoration portion of the five second decoration members 880. The effect that 885c is visually recognized integrally by the player can be produced.

  Here, as described above, it is possible to improve the performance performance when the player can visually recognize the second covering portion 885 if the plurality of second covering portions 885 can be firmly integrated with each other. This integration can be performed by visually recognizing the light diffusion decorative portion 885c so as to be continuously connected in the circumferential direction. Therefore, it is possible to improve performance performance in the combined state when the second covering portion 885 is disposed on the front side.

  The member outer end portion 885 b of the second covering portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832, and the end surface 885 b 1 that is close to (contacts with) the member outer end portion 875 b of the first covering portion 875 is formed. Further, the first decorative member 870 protrudes from the plane on which the metal rod 832 is disposed as a reference.

  As a result, when the third motion unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in the combined state (see FIG. 32), the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 disposed on the back side is in the player's view. The degree of entering can be lowered, and the influence on the production can be reduced.

  Thereby, when the frame portion of the first covering portion 875 and the frame portion of the second covering portion 885 are colored with different colors, the second covering portion 885 is disposed on the front side. Sometimes, the color of the first covering portion 875 can be easily prevented from entering the field of view.

  In particular, when the third operation unit 800 is set in the overhanging state alone in the combined state (see FIG. 32), compared to the case where the other operation units 600 and 700 are in the overhanging state (see FIG. 32). 33, F9), there are many gaps around the third operation unit 800, and the line of sight of viewing the third operation unit 800 from an oblique direction is easy to pass. Therefore, without taking measures, the side effect of the third operation unit 800 is visually recognized, so that it is easy to reduce the effect.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the end surface 885b1 of the second covering portion 885 is disposed closer to the rear than the center of the front-rear width of the side surface in the combined state. Even if the side surface of the unit 800 is visually recognized, most of the side surface can be visually recognized as a portion of the second covering portion 885, and the degree to which the first covering portion 875 is visually recognized can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to make the second covering portion 885 easier to show than the first covering portion 875 in the series merged state, and it is possible to improve the effect.

  In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individual combined state and the continuous combined state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotating member 830 so that the inner rotating member 830 rotates, while the outer rotating member 840 is a torque limiter. The rotation is stopped by the load from 866.

  Although the sliding area 831b reduces the contact area, when the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 increases, and the torque limiter 866 is increased. Therefore, the allowable value of load transmission of the torque limiter 866 must be increased, and downsizing of the torque limiter 866 tends to be hindered.

  Therefore, it is preferable that the rotation resistance of the inner rotation member 830 can be suppressed. Therefore, the present embodiment has the following features. For example, the support portions between the inner rotary member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 are only the front end contacting the sliding member 825 and the rear end supported by the central ring gear 864. In other parts, a gap is formed. Thereby, the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 can be reduced, and the displacement resistance can be easily reduced.

  For example, since the inner rotation member 830 is not fastened and fixed to the central annular gear 864, it is considered that a stopper for suppressing forward displacement with respect to the central annular gear 864 is necessary. A sliding member 825 functions as this stopper. That is, the sliding member 825 can receive a load in the direction of pushing forward from the inner rotating member 830, but the sliding member 825 has a front surface that contacts the short-diameter annular portion 822 a of the circular plate portion 822 in the front-rear direction. Touch.

  The short-diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the back side of the circular plate portion 822 as an annular projection having an outer diameter similar to the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and has a semicircular cross section at the outermost diameter portion. A protruding portion 822b projecting on the side is formed in an annular shape.

  Since the protruding portion 822b contacts the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, the contact area can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire rear surface of the short diameter annular portion 822a contacts the sliding member 825. Can do. Thereby, the displacement resistance of the rotation direction of the inner side rotation member 830 can be reduced.

  In addition, since the fastening screw is not used between the inner side rotation member 830 and the center ring gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner side rotation member 830 assumed when there is an increase in the weight of the fastening screw is reduced accordingly. Can do.

  The fixing of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 will be described. In the description of this fixing, FIGS. 62 and 63 are referred to as appropriate.

  The first decorative member 870 is fixed to the rotating member 834 by using a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 872 of the first skeleton portion 871 and a female screw of the fastened portion 876 formed at the rear portion of the frame of the first covering portion 875. After the first covering portion 875 is fastened and fixed to the first skeleton portion 871 by screwing into the first skeleton portion 871, an overhanging portion 873 protruding from the end of the semicircular concave portion of the first skeleton portion 871 is provided. This can be done by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted outside) and screwing the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.

  The second decorative member 880 is fixed to the rotating member 834 by using a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 882 of the second skeleton portion 881 and a female screw of the fastening portion 886 formed at the rear portion of the frame of the second covering portion 885. After the second covering portion 885 is fastened and fixed to the second skeleton portion 881 by screwing into the second skeleton portion 881, an overhanging portion 883 protruding from the end of the semicircular concave portion of the second skeleton portion 881 is provided. This can be done by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted outside) and screwing the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.

  In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member are accompanied by the linear displacement or rotational displacement of the rotating member 834. The member 880 can be configured to be linearly displaced or rotationally displaced.

  In the fixing process, the projecting portions 873 and 883 enter the recessed grooves 833d of the linear motion member 833, whereby the arrangement of the skeleton portions 871 and 881 on the linear motion member 833 (the arrangement of the metal rod 832 in the longitudinal direction). ) And the skeleton portions 871 and 881 can be prevented from falling off the linear motion member 833.

  Since the skeleton parts 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the arrangement of the linear member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832) is defined for the rotating member 834 as well. The member 834 can be prevented from dropping from the linear motion member 833.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in assembling the rotating member 834 to the linearly moving member 833, the skeleton portions 871 and 881 in which the portions defining the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linearly moving member 833 are fixed to the rotating member 834. Therefore, unlike the case where the portion defining the arrangement on the linear motion member 833 is formed on the rotating member 834 itself, the number of steps for assembly and disassembly can be reduced.

  That is, for example, at the time of disassembly, if the fastening screws that fasten and fix the skeleton portions 871 and 881 to the rotating member 834 are removed, the provision of the arrangement of the skeleton portions 871 and 881 on the linear motion member 833 can be canceled. Not only that, but also the rotation member 834 can be released from the definition of the arrangement on the linear movement member 833. Thereby, working efficiency can be improved.

  With reference to FIG.70 and FIG.71, the combination operation | movement of each operation | movement unit 600-800 is demonstrated. 70 (a) to 70 (d) and 71 (a) to 71 (d) illustrate an operation unit 500 that schematically illustrates an example of a combination operation of each operation unit 600 to 800 in time series. It is a front schematic diagram. In the description of FIGS. 70 and 71, FIGS. 33 to 35 are referred to as appropriate.

  70 and 71, the effect surfaces 661a to 661c of the first motion unit 600, the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 of the second motion unit 700, and the covering portions 875 and 885 of the third motion unit 800, respectively. The decoration in FIG. 2 is schematically illustrated so as to be identifiable by characters or the like.

  That is, the first effect surface 661a is vertically written with the word “normal”, the second effect surface 661b is horizontally written with the word “activate”, and the third effect surface 661c is in the longitudinal direction. A symbol “!” Is shown along the line.

  Also, the first main decorative surface 787a1 has a character “War open”, the first sub decorative surface 787a2 has a character “Pinch is a chance”, and the second main decorative surface 787b1 has an “attack”. And the characters “Patience !?” are shown on the second sub decorative surface 787b2.

  In addition, different alphanumeric characters (“I” to “V”) corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first covering portion 875, and five pieces of integral “◯” are displayed on the second covering portion 885. "Symbol is illustrated.

  In FIG. 70 (a), each of the operation units 600 to 800 is arranged in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28). In addition, above the second operation unit 700, a first sub-decoration surface 787a2 as a surface that is not visible in the front view but is visible from the player's perspective is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  In FIG. 70B, the first motion unit 600 is in the intermediate effect state, the second motion unit 700 is in the intermediate effect state, and the third motion unit 800 is in the overhanging state.

  By executing the integral rotation operation of the third operation unit 800, the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 disposed in the vicinity of the second operation unit 700 can be sequentially replaced. In addition, by continuing the integrated rotation operation or after stopping, the first operation unit 600 is set to the intermediate effect state, so that the third effect surface 661c is projected inside the center frame 86, and the operation units 600 to 800 are operated. You can make the movement lively.

  For example, when the third effect surface 661c is visible, the interest of the player who visually recognizes the operation of the first operation unit 600 can be improved by controlling the effect so that the expectation degree of the lottery is increased. it can.

  When the integral rotation operation is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decoration surface 787a1 of the second operation unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decoration member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700 are displayed. Can be visually recognized.

  Thereby, the attention with respect to the 1st decoration member 870 arrange | positioned adjacent to the 2nd operation | movement unit 700 can be improved, and the display effect relevant to the decoration formed in the 1st decoration member 870 is shown in the 3rd symbol display apparatus. By returning the third motion unit 800 to the effect standby state while starting at 81, the player's line of sight can be smoothly guided to the third symbol display device 81.

  The first decorative member 870 to be noticed is not limited to the first decorative member 870 disposed in the vicinity of the second operation unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light emitting portion 823b (see FIG. 60) arranged so that the first decorative member 870 can be irradiated with light, the LED that irradiates the light LD1 toward the first decorative member 870 to be noticed By turning on and turning off the other LEDs, it is possible to draw attention to any first decorative member 870.

  At this time, the LED lighting pattern may be switched in a state where the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 is stopped, or the LED lighting pattern may be switched in accordance with the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870. .

  When the lighting pattern of the LED is switched in accordance with the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870, the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotationally displaced along the coaxial circle by sequentially switching the LED to be lit in the rotation direction. The player may be visually recognized as if Further, the LED to be lit is fixed, and the first decoration that is irradiated with light using the fact that the first decoration members 870 sequentially reach the position irradiated with light from the LED by the integral rotation operation. The member 870 may be switched.

  In the state shown in FIG. 70 (a), the second decorative rotating member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operation unit 600 are both provided with a decoration that is formed in a vertically long shape, and can be visually recognized integrally. In particular, since the front side surface of the decoration fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction, similarly to the first effect surface 661a in the effect standby state, the effect of being integrally recognized is enhanced.

  On the other hand, when the state shown in FIG. 71 (a) is reached, in addition to the displacement of the lower end portion of the second decorative rotating member 660 away from the decorative fixing member 670 in the middle of the process shown in FIG. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 of the unit 600 is a horizontally-decorated decoration, the sense of unity with the decoration fixing member 670 is reduced, and this time, the second motion unit 700 having a horizontally-decorated decoration in the same manner. The covering member 787 can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 35, the intermediate performance state of the second motion unit 700 is shown, but as shown in FIG. 71A, when the second motion unit 700 is in the overhanging state, the covering member 787 and the second motion unit 700 are 2 The vertical distance from the decorative rotating member 660 is further reduced, and the effect of being integrally recognized can be enhanced.

  At this time, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is overhanging at a position where it can be visually recognized, and the above-described action is performed so that the right edge of the third symbol display device 81 is expanded to the right of the region right end RE1. Even if the arrangement of the two performance surfaces 661b is closer to the right edge, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a tight impression.

  Further, similarly to the second main decoration surface 787b1, the second effect surface 661b can be visually recognized by the player so as to be arranged on the center side of the third symbol display device 81. The effect that the surface 787b1 and the second effect surface 661b are visually recognized integrally can be enhanced.

  In this case, the second decoration surface 661b and the second main decoration surface 787b1 (first main decoration surface 787a1) are formed as the decoration of the overhanging decoration portion 652b by the contents related to the second effect surface 661b. The effect that the main decoration surface 787b1 (first main decoration surface 787a1), the second effect surface 661b, and the overhanging decoration portion 652b are visually recognized can be enhanced.

  70 (c) and 70 (d), the first motion unit 600 and the third motion unit 800 are in the effect standby state, and the second motion unit 700 is in the overhanging state. 70 (d) illustrates the reversal operation of the second operation unit 700. In the extended state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the covering member 787 of the second operation unit 700. Therefore, the reversing operation (see FIG. 59) of the covering member 787 can be performed even when the first operation unit 600 is in the overhanging state.

  In the reversing operation of the covering member 787, the sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 that are different from each other are directed to the front side, so that it can be in a state having no discriminating power as described above, but as shown in FIG. In addition, the player may be able to identify the contents by combining different sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2.

  According to FIG. 70 (d), the player can identify the contents of “Pinch !?” and pay attention to the subsequent movement of the second motion unit 700 by stopping the driving of the second motion unit 700 in this state. Therefore, the player's line of sight can be collected in the second operation unit 700.

  For example, when notifying that the lottery is off, control is made to return to the state of FIG. 70 (c) from the state of FIG. 70 (d), and the case where the lottery result is not yet notified or that the lottery is a big hit is notified. In such a case, the player's line of sight can be collected in the second motion unit 700 by performing control so as to continue the reversal from the state of FIG. 70 (d) to the state shown in FIG. 71 (a).

  In FIG. 71 (a), the first motion unit 600 and the second motion unit 700 are in the overhanging state, and the third motion unit 800 is in the effect standby state. In addition, above the second operation unit 700, a second sub-decorative surface 787b2 that is not visible in front view but is visible from the player's perspective is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  In the state shown in FIG. 71 (a), the second effect surface 661b and the second main decoration surface 787b1 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written on each of them are written horizontally, so that the player can see it integrally. Easy to do. Moreover, since the content is a content that has a series of meanings of “attack activation”, it is easier to visually recognize the content.

  In the first operation unit 600, in the production standby state (see FIG. 70A), the first production surface 661a and the decoration fixing member 670 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written on each are vertically written. Since there is, it is easy to make a player visually recognize integrally. In addition, the contents are a series of meanings of “normal time”, so that it is easy to visually recognize them as a whole.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the rendering surfaces 661a and 661b of the first operation unit 600 are integrated with the side surfaces of different members (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decorative fixing member 670). It is composed. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  71 (b) to 71 (d), the first motion unit 600 and the second motion unit 700 are in the effect standby state, and the third motion unit 800 is in the overhanging state. The state shown in FIG. 71 (b) and the state shown in FIG. 71 (c) differ in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 when the third operation unit 800 performs the integral rotation operation. On the other hand, even if the switching rotation operation is executed from any state, it can be visually recognized by the player as the same union state (see FIG. 71 (d)).

  That is, the player cannot recognize the difference in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 when the second decorative member 880 faces the front side. As a result, the operation control of the third operation unit 800 is set so as to notify the success or failure of the jackpot by executing the switching rotation operation at the end of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the symbol variation. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting the presence / absence of the big hit from the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

  In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 in the final stage of the display effect (whether in the state shown in FIG. 71 (b) or the state shown in FIG. 71 (c)) The feeling of expectation can be maintained in the same way. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operation unit 800 can be kept high.

  As described above, each of the operation units 600 to 800 can form a case where the decoration is visually recognized alone and a case where the decoration is visually recognized integrally. Therefore, the decoration formed in each operation unit 600-800 is not completed only by each operation unit 600-800, but is designed as a decoration related to each other in each operation unit 600-800.

  The drive control of each of the operation units 600 to 800 is influenced by the arrangement of the operation units. That is, if the driving of each of the operation units 600 to 800 is executed at an improper timing, there is a possibility that the member operation may collide and break down. Therefore, in driving control, the arrangement of members of other units is determined. To be controlled.

  For example, the change of the first operation unit 600 to the overhang state is controlled to be executed when the state of the second operation unit 700 may be arbitrary and the third operation unit 800 is determined to be in the effect standby state. The

  As for the change to the intermediate performance state of the first operation unit 600, the state of the second operation unit 700 may be arbitrary, the top and bottom arrangement of the third operation unit 800 may be arbitrary, and the rotation operation does not cause a switching rotation operation. It is controlled to be executed when it is determined.

  The change of the second operation unit 700 to the overhanging state is controlled such that the state of the first operation unit 600 may be arbitrary, and the third operation unit 800 is executed when it is determined to be in the effect standby state.

  As for the change to the intermediate performance state of the second operation unit 700, the state of the first operation unit 600 may be arbitrary, the upper and lower arrangement of the third operation unit 800 may be arbitrary, and the rotation operation is not caused by the switching rotation operation. It is controlled to be executed when it is determined.

  In the control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the overhanging state and the rotation is not executed or only the integral rotation operation is performed, it is determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state, and the second operation unit 700 is It is executed when it is determined as an intermediate effect state or an effect standby state.

  The control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the overhanging state and the switching rotation operation occurs is executed when the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the effect standby state and the second operation unit 700 is determined to be in the effect standby state. Is done.

  As described above, the drive control of each of the operation units 600 to 800 is not possible at an arbitrary timing, and is controlled to be executed after determining the arrangement of members of other units.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the ball once flows down to the near side by the sorting device 300 and then flows backward, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the time required for the flow of the sphere may be secured by forming a plurality of path bends and a deceleration convex portion for decelerating the sphere without forming a portion that flows to the near side.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 is a curved surface shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the flow of the sphere is blocked by contact. Any shape can be used. For example, it may be configured in an inclined plane shape, or may be formed so that a large number of fine convex portions protrude from the plane, and an irregular load may be applied to the colliding sphere.

  In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows down the flow path components 334 to 336 in order when flowing down the sorting apparatus 300, but is not necessarily limited thereto. It is not a thing. For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed in the left and right central portion of the specific winning opening 65a, and a sphere may be formed so as to be able to directly flow into the third flow path component 336 through this opening.

  For example, when a sphere enters one ball at a time, the sphere does not pass through the opening, but when a plurality of spheres enter the specific winning opening 65a, the sphere can pass through the opening. Also good. In this case, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the opening or not.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning opening 65a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path component 335. In this case, the order of the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 335 may be reversed. That is, in entering the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, a branch to the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after the flow in the left-right direction, or immediately after the flow in the front-rear direction (flow toward the front side). In addition, branching to the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may occur.

  In the first embodiment, the flow channel direction and the inclination of each of the flow channel components 334 to 336 have been described as a feature of the sorting apparatus 300 alone, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed on an island, the flow direction and inclination may be designed in consideration of “nekase” that is performed on a daily basis.

  Nekase means that the pachinko machine 10 is not installed in a vertical posture but is installed in a state of being inclined in the front-rear direction. Normally, a pachinko machine is installed in a posture that leans backward about one degree (four quarters). Compared to the description in the above-described sorting apparatus 300 alone (in a state where there is no twist), in consideration of the installation angle of about 1 degree, the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path having an inclination in the front-rear direction. The meaning of the inclination of the component 336 changes.

  That is, in the sorting apparatus 300 alone, as described above, the first flow path component 334 is inclined downward by 7 degrees from the horizontal to the front side, and the third flow path structure 336 is lowered by 5 degrees from the horizontal to the rear side. Although it is designed to be inclined, if the installation angle is considered, the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 similarly form a flow path that is inclined downward by 6 degrees. . On the other hand, since the second flow path component 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, it is not easily affected by the installation angle, and can be regarded as an inclination of about 5 degrees as described above.

  In this case, with respect to the flow of the sphere in the sorting apparatus 300, the acceleration of the sphere in the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 is the same, and there is a slight acceleration in the second flow path component 335. Get smaller. Therefore, since the falling speed of the sphere in the left-right direction can be reduced, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335. Also, since the first flow path component 334 is shorter than the third flow path component 336, the first flow path component 334 is shorter than the third flow path component 336. Can be passed between.

  As described above, the flow of the sphere inside the sorting apparatus 300 is influenced by the spiking of the pachinko machine 10 because it has the flow path in the front-rear direction. Therefore, if the inclination angle of each flow path component 334, 336 is made smaller than the angle (about 1 degree), the flow direction of the spheres in the flow path components 334, 336 changes depending on whether the flow is good (angle setting). Therefore, it is necessary to set the inclination angle as an angle larger than the twist angle.

  Further, the flow of the sphere inside the sorting apparatus 300 has a flow path in the front-rear direction, and in the configuration in which the flow path is visible, from the slight difference in the flow velocity of the sphere flowing down the flow path, There is a possibility that the level of the pachinko machine 10 will be grasped. In order to dare to grasp the degree of sneaking, a configuration in which the flow path of the sorting apparatus 300 is easily visible can be used.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the fixed member 161 and the front design member around the front side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 so that the degree of “negotiation” cannot be grasped from a slight difference in the flow velocity of the sphere. 162 is disposed so as to surround the variable prize-winning device 65 on the upper side, and the light diffusion processing surface 340 is configured so as to deteriorate visibility on the lower side.

  In this way, the visibility of the spheres flowing down the respective flow path components 334 to 336 is made worse except for the normal player's line of sight (a range of about 0 degrees to about 30 degrees when viewed from the front). Thereby, it is possible to avoid grasping the degree of “negotiation” of the pachinko machine 10 by comparing the flow velocities of the spheres flowing down the flow path components 334 to 336.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the inclination of the first flow path component 334 is larger than the inclination of the third flow path component 336 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, this inclination relationship may be reversed, or a similar inclination may be used.

  Moreover, although each flow path structure part 334-336 demonstrated that a linear flow path bent, and comprised a spiral flow path, respectively, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the shape of a meandering flow path or the shape of a flow path bent in a step shape may be used.

  Moreover, although it is comprised so that a flow path may be bent at right angle in the connection location of each flow path structure part 334-336, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the flow path may be bent at an acute angle or an obtuse angle at the connection location. Moreover, you may employ | adopt a croon as each flow path structure part 334-336.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow path component 336 is designed to be 0.3 seconds has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the time required to pass through the third flow path component 336 may be designed to be 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). As a result, even when the ball enters the sorting device 300 while maintaining the firing interval (0.6 seconds), the upstream ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 is moved to the downstream side. In FIG. 5, the third flow path component 336 can function as a blindfold of a sphere flowing down.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the flow time of the sphere is ensured by securing the path length of the flow path components 334 to 336 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, long ridges are formed in the direction crossing the flow direction of the game ball from both inner walls of the path to the slide displacement member 370, and the ridges are alternately projected, and the ridges collide with the game ball. Thus, the sphere may be decelerated. As a result, it is possible to secure the sphere flow-down time without increasing the path length.

  The deceleration ridges may be arranged evenly over the entire range of the path to the slide displacement member 370, or the arrangement may be uneven. For example, the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 335 are not formed with ridges, and only the third flow path component 336 is formed with the third flow path component 336. Up to this point, the sphere can be quickly reached, while the sphere can be configured to gently flow down the third flow path component 336.

  Further, the protruding direction of the protrusion may be a direction in which the protrusion is alternately protruded inward along the flow path of the sphere from the left-right direction, or protrudes upward from the lower side with a predetermined interval. Such a direction is also acceptable.

  In the case of projecting from the left and right direction, since the load applied to the sphere from the ridge has a component in the left and right direction, it is preferable to consider the arrangement so that the sphere is not erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by this load. For example, at the position closest to the slide displacement member 370, the load from the ridge does not go to the normal detection sensor SE12 side but goes to the partition plate 338 side by projecting from the left and right outer wall portions to the left and right inner sides. By doing so, it can be easily avoided that the sphere is erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

  In the case of projecting from the lower side to the upper side, since the protrusion itself may function as a blindfold of the slide displacement member 370, it is preferable to design the formation height and formation position in consideration of the player's line of sight. .

  In addition, you may form a protrusion so that it may appear and move. In this case, the flow of the sphere may be stopped in the exited state, and the flow of the sphere may be resumed when the sunk state is reached.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which blinding is performed by a sphere flowing down the front side of the slide displacement member 370, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a movable decorative member may be arranged in front of the sorting apparatus 300, and the flow path components 334 to 336 may be blinded by the decorative member. This decorative member may be driven or operated with the weight of a sphere.

  Further, in the case where the sphere is blindfolded, it is not limited to the case where the sphere is arranged on the near side. For example, when a mirror is disposed on the back side of the slide displacement member 370 and the state of the slide displacement member 370 is visually recognized using the reflection of the mirror, the ball is disposed between the slide displacement member 370 and the mirror. If done, a blindfold function can be produced.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere reaching the slide displacement member 370 is hidden is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the first winning port 64 may be arranged behind the game area as in the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning port 64 may be blinded, or the other general winning ports 63 may be blinded. Things can be used.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the flow path components 334 to 336 are linear and formed from flow paths capable of guiding spheres one by one has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be formed as a meandering flow path, or may be formed as a flow path in which a plurality of branches occur, or a sphere is likely to stay at a location where the flow path width is large and the flow path width is large. It may be configured.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the blinding effect is generated by the sphere toward the slide displacement member 370 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a discharge path for discharging a ball that has entered the other winning holes 63, 64, 65, 140 is arranged on the front side of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, arranged so as to cross the front side), The slide displacement member 370 may be hidden by a discharge path and a sphere disposed in the discharge path.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows exclusively through the first flow path component 334 to the second flow path component 335 side (front side) has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism that distributes the balls to the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a is disposed, and the distribution mechanism selects the spheres that flow toward the second flow path component 335, so that some The sphere may flow to the second flow path component 335 side.

  The allocating mechanism may be displaced by the weight of the sphere, or may be driven by the driving device so as to operate constantly from the opening / closing of the opening / closing plate 65b, or driven in a certain pattern from the power-on of the pachinko machine. You may control as follows.

  In the case of driving control, for example, when the type of the incoming ball changes, the ball may be controlled to flow toward the second flow path component 335 side. For example, in the case of a ball entering the specific winning port 65a, when there is a ball (excess winning) exceeding the count number (10 / round), the ball flows to the second flow path component 335 side. May be. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 side can be compared with the number of excess prize balls paid out, so that the player can grasp the additional profits obtained at an early stage. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and the downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

  Also, for example, in a configuration in which a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 flows down the sorting apparatus 300, if there is a ball when the number of reserved special symbols 1 is four (full tank), You may comprise the ball | bowl so that it may flow to the 2nd flow-path structure part 335 side. In this case, by visually recognizing the sphere flowing through the second flow path component 335 side, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols 1 is full. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and the downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

  When the displacement operation is performed by the weight of the sphere, the predetermined operation may be repeated every time the sphere reaches, or a different operation may be performed depending on the number of the spheres reaching. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, it does not flow to the second flow path component 335 side, but when two or more balls enter the specific winning opening 65a together. A sphere may flow to the second flow path component 335 side. The reverse is also possible.

  In addition, these operation modes may be the same on the downstream side of the detection sensor SE1 provided in a pair on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right.

  Here, when the flow time of the ball from the specific winning opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370 is long, there is a possibility that the game may be prolonged due to the long ball discharge time. Therefore, for example, by using the above-described distribution mechanism, the balls up to the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a are caused to flow down to the second flow path component 335 side. You may comprise so that it may discharge, without passing through the flow-path structure part 335. This eliminates the need to wait for the count-numbered spheres to flow down the flow path components 334 to 336, so that the length between rounds can be set short.

  In the first embodiment, the distribution device 300 is arranged below the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is made to flow near the lower end of the game area. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, the specific winning opening 65a is disposed above the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the flow path components 334 to 336 of the distribution device 300 are disposed in proximity to the third symbol display device 81 or in front view. You may comprise so that it may arrange | position to the near side of a display area.

  In this case, the line of sight of the sphere flowing down the sorting apparatus 300 can be set to the line of sight facing the display area side of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, by associating the magnitude of the profit that the player can obtain by the flow of the ball with the distribution device 300 and the content of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player can confirm whether the profit is large or small by checking the display. It is possible to easily grasp whether it has been acquired.

  Moreover, although the ball | bowl which rolls the inner rail 61 was demonstrated in the position which shifted | deviated below by front view on the basis of the ball | bowl which rolls the 3rd flow-path structure part 336, it was not necessarily to this It is not limited. For example, the balls that roll on the inner rail 61 are configured in an arrangement relationship such that the balls that roll on the third flow path component 336 do not shift up and down in a front view and can be seen overlapping. Also good. In this case, not only the balls that have entered the sorting device 300 but also the balls that roll on the inner rail 61 can function as blindfolds for the balls that flow down the third flow path component 336.

  In the first embodiment, as an operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370, the case where the slide displacement member 370 is switched to the front position at a time when the ball that entered the specific winning opening 65a cannot reach has been described. It is not limited to. For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to be switched to the front position after 1.2 seconds from the opening timing of the opening / closing plate 65b.

  In this case, the front flow ball that has reached the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds elapses can enter the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the follower ball flows so as to follow the preceding flow ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after the elapse of 1.2 seconds, and enters the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

  Here, when the follower ball is in a positional relationship that functions as a blindfold of the front flow ball, the player determines the timing at which the flow of the front flow ball switches (downward) toward the probability change detection sensor SE11. It cannot be visually recognized because it is hidden. Moreover, since the follower ball normally enters the detection sensor SE12, it is considered that the player assumes that the ball has not entered the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

  In this way, since it can be seen as if a ball has not entered the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the display effects of the short time state and the probability variation state are similarly maintained to maintain the player's expectation. In a simple gaming machine, the effect of the display effect can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a sphere that has collided with the left and right inner projecting portion 318 does not flow to the normal detection sensor SE12 side only with a load caused by the collision, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the flow path on the upstream side of the left and right inner projecting portions 318 is configured so that a plurality of types of speeds and rotations of the spheres until being guided to the left and right inner projecting portions 318 can be configured (for example, Or increasing the path width to increase the degree of freedom in the flow direction of the sphere), and depending on the speed and rotation of the sphere, only the load caused by the collision with the left and right inner projecting portions 318 You may comprise so that it may be guided to normal detection sensor SE12.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the slide displacement member 370 and the projecting portions 317 to 319 are formed as separate bodies has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, at least one of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may be integrally formed with the slide displacement member 370. That is, at least one of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may project from the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370.

  In the first embodiment, the operation pattern Y considering the possibility of being hidden by a sphere has been described as the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the control of causing the LED of the light emitting unit 351 to emit light at the timing hidden by the sphere may be interwoven.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed according to the shape of the guide slot 616 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width of the guide long hole 616 to form the outer phase of the gap, or the displacement resistance may be changed using a magnetic force or a biasing force of a coil spring.

  In the said 1st Embodiment, although the shape of the guide long hole 616 was comprised by the shape bent in the middle position, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, it is good also as a shape bent several times. In this case, the position where the resistance of the vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases can be formed at a plurality of positions.

  Further, the shape of the guide slot 616 may be designed for the purpose of changing the amount of change in the angle θ during the rotation of the rotation member 620. For example, the guide long hole 616 may be formed in a shape capable of guiding the supported member 640 so that the range in which the angle θ can be maintained while the rotation member 620 is rotating is partially formed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the guide slot 616 is fixed has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a plurality of guide long holes 616 in which the axis O1 is movable are formed, and the axis O1 is defined by predetermined switching means (for example, another driving device or a button type switching device that is switched in contact with the rotating member 620). The guide long hole 616 to be guided may be switched, or the guide long hole 616 may be configured to change its shape.

  In the first embodiment, the configuration in which the first effect surface 661a is directed to the front diagonal left side in the state in which the second decorative rotating member 660 is disposed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 has been described. It is not a thing. For example, the effect surface may be configured to face the front diagonal right side in a state of being arranged on the left side of the third symbol display device 81, or when being arranged on the lower side (upper side) of the third symbol display device 81 In addition, the production surface may be configured to face forward obliquely upward (downward).

  In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is configured to be disposed on the base end side of the displacement. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and a member that is linearly displaced may be disposed on the base end side of the displacement. good. On the other hand, the use of the rotation member 620 instead of the linear movement member preferably functions to secure the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

  For example, when a laterally sliding member is fixed to the main drive side of the supported member 640, the angle that affects the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b is an angle above the horizontal (eg, angle a1). It is limited to. On the other hand, when the rotating member 620 is used, not only the angle above the horizontal but also the angle below (such as the angle b1) can be used. Regardless of this preferable effect, a member that linearly slides on the main drive side of the supported member 640 may be connected.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the second decorative rotating member 660 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape and decoration is applied to three side surfaces intersecting at right angles has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the second decorative rotating member 660 may be formed in a pentagonal cross section so that the stop control can be performed in a posture in which each side surface faces the front side.

  In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, it is possible to easily switch the display that can be easily viewed integrally with the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating shaft of the rotating member 620 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can intersect at right angles has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 may be configured with a component in the front-rear direction as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

  In the first embodiment, the case where the second operation unit 700 is configured to be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state from the setting of the urging force of the coil spring CS2 has been described. However, the configuration is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a magnet is disposed in the vicinity of the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the magnet is configured to generate an attracting force with the magnet disposed on the right front plate member 710. May be more likely to occur in the intermediate performance state of the second motion unit 700.

  Further, for example, the inclined portions 751 and 762 may not be formed linearly, but may be formed from a bent shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape. In addition, when the coil spring CS2 is used, the biasing force is not limited to the case where the biasing force is generated only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, and the biasing force with respect to the extension displacement of the coil spring CS2 may be generated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 is maintained by elastic deformation of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c until the attraction force of the magnet Mg is exceeded is described. It is not limited to. For example, instead of elastic deformation of the gear, an allowable value may be provided for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft rod and the support tube that supports the shaft rod.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the covering member 787 rises from below and enters the front side from the rear end of the game area, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the aspect which protrudes ahead by downward displacement may be sufficient. In this case, the aspect which crosses the upper edge of the center frame 86 from the bottom to the front may be used, or the aspect which protrudes from the upper side of the game area (for example, the upper side of the front frame 14) to the front side may be used.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the discriminating power is reduced because the auxiliary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are not visually recognized as a result of the rotation of the covering member 787 being in the reverse direction has been described. is not. For example, it is possible to adopt a mode in which the auxiliary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are rotated while facing the front side instead of being rotated toward the front side. Moreover, even if it is rotation of the same direction, you may comprise so that it may rotate by shifting a rotation angle.

  In the first embodiment, the second operation unit 700 and the third operation unit 800 are common, and the shaft rotation member 785 and the rotation member are utilized by using the rotation angle of the link mechanism (the intermediate arm member 783 and the intermediate arm member 850). Although it is configured to rotate (invert) 834, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug into a metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834 and a projecting piece protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotating member depends on the design of the groove. The rotation timing of 834 can be defined.

  In the first embodiment, a case is described in which control is performed so that it is determined that the switching rotation operation is switched to the integral rotation operation by switching the output of the detection sensor 813 from the state in which the detected portion 844 is arranged in the detection sensor 813. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by detecting that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection sensor 813 after reversing the drive direction of the drive motor 861 in a state where the detected portion 844 is not disposed on the detection sensor 813, You may determine with having switched to integral rotation operation.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the configuration of the first decorative member 870 and the configuration of the second decorative member 880 are configured to be different in some places has been described. However, the configuration is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the magnet Mg2 may be disposed on both the decorative members 870 and 880, or the plating processing may be performed on both the decorative members 870 and 880.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by arranging the torque limiter 866 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an oil damper that generates viscous resistance may be provided. In the case of an oil damper, resistance continues to occur at all times regardless of switching of the operation mode, so that the torque limiter can reduce the displacement resistance in the rotation direction after the operation mode is switched to the integral rotation operation. It is easy to achieve high-speed rotation after switching to the integral rotation operation.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plating portion 871a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the light may be reflected by the metal rod 832. During the integral rotation operation, the linear movement member 833 is arranged on the base end side (the inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear movement member 833. When 833 is arranged on the tip side (the outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, the light LD 1 can be reflected by exposing the base end side (the inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832. It is.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Points where the sphere passing through the route constructing unit becomes a blindfold of the passing unit>
Path configuration means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and passed-through means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path configuration means to pass therethrough, wherein the path configuration means in the predetermined direction view, Displaceable means that can be disposed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first game ball on the front side of the first game ball flowing down the path constituting means upstream of the means to be passed is provided. A gaming machine A1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game in which a winning component 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a game ball toward the ball detection hole 431 is configured and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is difficult to be recognized by the decorative board 302 is provided. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the decorative plate 302 is configured to make it difficult to recognize the ball detection hole 431 at all times. Therefore, it is confirmed that the ball has entered the ball detection hole 431 and the game ball is continuously started or stopped. There is a possibility that the player may feel dissatisfied because the game mode of performing is not supported. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in a portion related to the game ball launching operation.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the means for reducing the visibility of the first game ball in the path configuration means is a predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to configure a state in which the first game ball can be easily seen. Is done. Therefore, in a state where the first game ball is easily visible, it is easy to check the flow of the first game ball and determine whether to continue or stop the game ball launch operation. Improvements can be made in relevant areas.

  The mode of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited at all. For example, another game ball may be used, or a decorative member configured to be displaceable between the flow path of the game ball and the glass unit may be used.

  In addition, the aspect of the to-be-passed means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to a symbol lottery (for example, a start port), a prize ball outlet related to payout of a prize ball, or any other game balls that can pass It is also possible to use.

  In the gaming machine A1, the displaceable means is a second gaming ball that flows down the upstream side of the first gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the visibility of the first gaming ball can be changed using the gaming ball guided toward the passing means, so that the displaceable means As compared with the case where other decorative members are prepared, the material cost and the design cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A2, the path constituting means includes a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length capable of arranging the second game ball on the front side of the first game ball. .

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the front-rear direction path is configured so that the second gaming ball can be arranged on the front side of the first gaming ball. At least a part of the first game ball can be hidden by the game balls.

  In the gaming machine A3, the front-rear direction path is determined when the first game ball and the second game ball flow down the path configuration unit at a firing interval set in a launching device. A gaming machine A4, wherein a gaming ball is configured to hide at least a part of the first gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, when a plurality of gaming balls flow down the path construction means while maintaining the firing interval, it is difficult to recognize the first gaming ball by the second gaming ball. The effect to do can be show | played. Thereby, it is possible to cause a situation that is difficult to recognize from normal times.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the front-rear direction portion of the gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the front-side component is disposed closer to the center of the gaming area than the back-side component.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the front-rear direction path can be configured as a path having an inclination along the line of sight of the player who sees the passing means, so the first game ball Can be easily caused to be hidden by the second game ball. That is, the effect of blindfolding can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A5, the front side component is disposed on the line of sight of a player who sees the passing means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the same blinding effect is produced regardless of the length of the interval between the first game ball and the second game ball arranged in the front-rear direction path. be able to.

  That is, normally, it is considered that the closer the first game ball and the second game ball are, the more the blindfolding effect can be improved. However, the first game ball and the second game ball are on the line of sight. When the game balls are arranged, the influence of the length of the interval can be eliminated.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the path constituting unit includes a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length capable of arranging the second game ball on the front side of the first game ball, and the front-rear direction A gaming machine A7, comprising: a left-right direction path formed with a left-right width that allows a game ball to flow in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the path.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the player's line of sight can also be blocked by the game ball flowing down the left-right direction path. On the other hand, it is not limited to the case where the passing means is visually recognized with a line of sight that is not displaced left and right, and a blinding effect can be produced even for a line of sight that is displaced right and left. That is, regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner of entering the passing means (a blinding effect can be produced in all directions).

  This effect is remarkably generated by sealing the left and right sides of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction with a wall portion. That is, in the configuration in which the left and right sides are sealed with the wall, the wall is blinded on the left and right sides, so that it is easy to configure a state where the field of view to the passing means does not pass.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the path forming means includes a first flow path through which the game ball passes through the passed-through means in the first mode, and a second through which the game ball passes in the second mode. The first game ball can be visually recognized with at least a portion covered by the predetermined displaceable means regardless of which one of the flow paths of the path constituting means flows down. A gaming machine A8 that is configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, it is difficult to recognize the flow-down mode of the game ball flowing down the route-constituting means regardless of whether or not the passed-through means have passed. It is possible to improve the attention to the game ball flowing down the path forming means.

  The first mode and the second mode are not limited at all. For example, the aspect in which the flow direction of a sphere differs may be sufficient, and the aspect in which the detection sensor which a sphere passes may differ may be sufficient.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, provided with a branching means for dividing the flow direction of the game ball upstream of the means to be passed, the branching means comprises a switching means for switching the flow direction of the received game ball, The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the path configuration means is a game ball in which the flow down path is divided by the branching means, and the game ball that has reached the switching means flows down the same path in a predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the gaming ball that has reached the switching means flows down the same route in a predetermined section, so that the gaming ball that has reached the switching means immediately thereafter As compared with the case of the flow-down mode corresponding to the flow-down path, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the flow-down of the game ball. Thereby, the player's attention to the game ball can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A9, the path constituting means includes a projecting portion projecting on the side of the game ball that flows down, and the projecting portion acts on a branch of the game ball in the branching means. Machine A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, it can act on the branch of the game ball at the projecting portion, for example, compared with the case where the branch is caused by the movement of the valve body, The durability of can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A10, the protruding portion includes a first protruding portion that extends in a predetermined direction, and a second protruding portion that extends in a direction different from the first protruding portion, and the first protruding portion The gaming machine A11 is configured so that the projecting amount of the second projecting portion differs from the projecting amount of the second projecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A10, the influence of the first projecting portion on the game ball and the effect of the second projecting portion on the game ball according to the flow-down mode of the game ball Can be different. Thereby, the effect | action which branches a game ball by the predetermined | prescribed rule according to the flow-down mode of a game ball can be produced, utilizing a fixed 1st protrusion part and a 2nd protrusion part.

<Points where the sphere passing through the path construction means appeals to the passage means>
A path configuration means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; and a passed-through means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path configuration means to pass therethrough, wherein the path configuration means is more than the passed-through means. A gaming machine B1 comprising a predetermined portion constituting the upstream side, the predetermined portion being arranged on a more conspicuous side than the passing means, and configured to be able to guide a game ball to the passing means.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a large winning component 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of game balls toward the ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured to be difficult to recognize by the decorative plate 302. Depending on the state of the winning component 300, there is a gaming machine in which the game ball flows down from a position off the decorative board 302, or the game ball flows down so as to be hidden behind the decorative board 302 (for example, a special game machine). No. 2017-185021). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a game ball with good visibility that flows down from the decorative plate 302 is configured to flow off the ball detection hole 431 and is hidden behind the decorative plate 302. Since a part of the game ball that flows down is guided to the ball detection hole 431, the good or bad visibility of the game ball does not correspond to some of the profits that the player can obtain, and attention was paid to the game ball It was easy to be wasted, and the player could feel frustrated. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in that the flow-down mode of the game ball after attracting attention is meaningful.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined portion arranged on the conspicuous side is configured to be guided to the passing means, the degree of improvement in attention to the game ball, The game ball can be associated with the passing means. Therefore, since the possibility that the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined part can pass through the passing means can be improved, it can be improved in that it is meaningful to pay attention to the game ball after attracting attention.

  Also, with this configuration, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight with the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion, and the possibility that the player misses that the game ball goes to the passing means is reduced. be able to.

  In addition, the aspect of the to-be-passed means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to a symbol lottery (for example, a start port), a prize ball outlet related to payout of a prize ball, or any other game balls that can pass It is also possible to use.

  In addition, the aspect of the conspicuous side is not limited at all. For example, it may be on the display device side that is easy to catch the player's eyes, on the prize opening side or on the start side, on the front side (front side) that is easily visible to the player, or to the specific entrance Directly connected to the stage (mainly the place where game balls are temporarily held at the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame) as a part where the line of sight tends to gather as a place where the probability of entering the ball is markedly high On the V prize opening side, the ball lending device side as the operation target, the production operation button side, the range where the game balls that deviate from the ball entrance flow (the range where the player is regrettable and chased with eyes) The bright side or the other side may be used for switching between light and dark in the light emitting means. Alternatively, the inconspicuous side may be formed so as to be relatively conspicuous.

  In the gaming machine B1, the path configuration unit includes a second predetermined unit that makes the game ball that has entered the path configuration unit less noticeable than when the ball is entered, and the predetermined unit is more than the second predetermined unit. A gaming machine B2 that is arranged on a conspicuous side.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1, before the gaming ball that has entered the path forming means flows down the predetermined part, the attention is reduced in the second predetermined part, thereby causing the predetermined part to flow down. It is possible to highlight the attention of the game ball when playing.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the predetermined part includes a section in which the falling speed of the gaming ball is different.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the effect of collecting the player's line of sight can be improved as compared to the case where there is no difference in the flow speed of the gaming ball.

  In the gaming machine B3, the second falling speed of the gaming ball flowing down the second predetermined portion is configured to be higher than the first falling speed of the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined portion. A gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, it is possible to shorten the period until the gaming ball that has entered the path forming means reaches the predetermined part.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the predetermined unit includes a section in which a displacement speed of the gaming ball in a predetermined direction view is different.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, sections in which the apparent displacement speed of the gaming ball in a predetermined direction view is different regardless of the magnitude of the actual flowing speed of the gaming ball. Since it can be configured, it is possible to easily gather the player's line of sight at a predetermined location and divert the eyes from other portions by reducing the displacement speed of the game ball in a predetermined direction at any predetermined location. .

  In addition, the aspect in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball is made different is not limited at all. For example, it may be different between the case of displacing on a straight line arranged in a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction in front view and the case of displacing on a straight line having a front-rear direction component, It may be different from the case of displacement in a curved shape or a meandering shape, or may be different.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, provided with introduction means configured to be able to introduce a game ball into the path configuration means, the predetermined portion is disposed outside the introduction means in a predetermined direction view. Characteristic gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the visibility of the introducing means can be ensured in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both of ensuring the visibility of the introducing means and improving the attention of a game ball that is highly likely to pass through the passed means.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, there is provided an avoiding means configured so that a game ball on the front side of the route forming means flows down so as to avoid the line of sight toward the passing means or the predetermined portion. A gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the game ball is configured to flow down on the front side of the path forming means, and the flow path of the game ball is directed toward the passing means Since the avoidance means for avoiding the problem is provided, it is possible to achieve both ensuring the size of the game area and ensuring the visibility of the game ball toward the passed means.

  In addition, the flow-down mode of the game ball affected by the avoidance means is not limited at all. For example, it may flow down avoiding the front position of the passed means, may flow down avoiding a straight line connecting the passed means and the position of the player's eyes, or a game ball heading to the passed means Based on the last position that can be confirmed by the player, it may flow down avoiding the front position of that position, or it may flow down avoiding the straight line connecting the last position described above and the position of the player's eyes. Good or other.

  In the gaming machine B7, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state changing means configured to be able to change a state between an accepting state in which a flowing game ball can be accepted and a non-accepting state in which the game ball cannot be accepted, the accepting state changing means being The gaming machine B8 is configured to be able to guide the game ball that has reached the acceptance state changing means in the acceptance state to the path construction means side in the state change from the acceptance state to the non-acceptance state. .

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B7, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball that has flowed down so as to be bridged after reaching the receiving state changing means from blocking the line of sight toward the passing means. Can do.

  In the gaming machine B7 or B8, the game machine B7 or B8 is provided above the passing means in a front view, and includes a partitioning means for partitioning the game area, and the partitioning means is configured to allow the game ball to flow down on the left and right outer sides. Characteristic gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7 or B8, the partitioning means can avoid the situation where the game ball flows down the front position of the passing means, so the field of view toward the passing means is reduced. It can be easily secured.

  In addition, as an aspect of a division means, it is not limited at all. For example, it may be a plate-like portion that constitutes the flow surface of the game ball, or may be a entrance forming means that can enter the game ball. The partition means may be a shape (appearance) fixed means or a shape (appearance) variable means.

  In the gaming machine B9, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state changing means configured to change a state between an accepting state in which a flowing game ball can be accepted and a non-accepting state in which the game ball cannot be accepted, and the acceptance of the partition means The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that the portion on the state changing means side is configured to easily guide the game ball to the receiving state changing means side.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, it is possible to configure the game ball being accepted by the receiving state changing means to be received in a manner of being pushed into the receiving state changing means by the partitioning means. Thereby, it can be made easy to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball that has slid in a state of being accepted deviates from the acceptance state changing means and falls on the front side of the passing means.

  For example, a special winning device provided with an opening / closing plate that tilts and displaces in the left-right direction axis is assumed as the acceptance state changing means, and a first winning opening arranged above the special winning opening of the special winning device is assumed as the partitioning means. . Game balls that have reached the special winning opening just before the closing of the opening / closing plate are often sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening / closing plate and the edge of the opening that is covered by the opening / closing plate, and the direction in which the edge is formed ( It slides sideways in the direction of the pivot axis of the opening / closing plate.

  Since the game ball after skidding can reach any position in the formation range of the rotation tip of the opening / closing plate, when the opening / closing plate is arranged above the means to be passed, the game ball slipped. There is a possibility that the later game ball falls to the front side and then passes through the front position of the means to be passed, and the game ball after skidding should not be dropped to the front side.

  If it is impossible to avoid the fall of the game ball to the front side after skidding, it is necessary to arrange the opening and closing plate avoiding the front view position of the means to be passed, so the degree of freedom in designing the opening and closing plate is reduced. become.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball after sliding to fall to the front side of the opening / closing plate, and to improve the design freedom of the opening / closing plate.

  In any one of the gaming machines B7 to B10, the game ball flowing down the path forming unit and the game ball flowing down the front side of the path forming unit are configured to flow down in a similar flow mode. A gaming machine B11.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B7 to B10, the gaming ball that may flow down the path forming means and pass through the passed means and the front side of the path forming means flow down. By making it difficult to distinguish a game ball that does not pass through the passed means, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the number of game balls that flow down the path forming means.

  In other words, it can be difficult to discriminate from the game balls flowing down near the route forming means whether the game balls are likely to enter the route forming means or not.

  Any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, comprising a light emitting means for irradiating light from the rear side of the sphere flowing down the predetermined portion.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, it is possible to easily avoid that the front side of the sphere flowing down the predetermined portion is reflected by light and the sphere becomes difficult to see.

<Points to secure the path length to the V entrance in a space-saving manner>
A path configuration means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, a passed-through means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path configuration means to pass, and a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the passed-through means; State switching means configured to be switchable between a second state different from the first state, and the path forming means includes delay means for delaying the vertical displacement of the game ball, and the delay means A gaming machine C1 configured to be able to flow down a game ball toward the passing means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a distribution unit 75 configured to be movable to the left and right is disposed in the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 12, and the game ball is arranged depending on the arrangement of the distribution unit 75. There is a gaming machine that is configured to be able to change the flow direction of the game (see, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the short-term operation of the allocating unit 75 is indispensable for preventing the erroneous entry to the specific area 73 and the ball biting by the allocating unit 75, and depending on the player, There was a case where the behavior of the minute portion 75 felt distrust and the game could not be continued with peace of mind.

  As an example of means for solving this problem, it is assumed that the flow path length from the second grand prize winning opening 12 to the distribution unit 75 is increased. For example, by changing the arrangement of the distribution unit 75 from just below the second grand prize opening 12 to a position near the left and right center of the game area (near the first big prize opening 10), It is possible to ensure a long flow path length to the distribution unit 75. Thereby, it is considered that the possibility of erroneous winning in the specific area 73 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when this means is executed, it is necessary to ensure the visibility of the flow path of the game ball over a wide range from the second grand prize opening 12 to the first big prize opening 10, and the design of the game area is free in this range. The degree is limited. That is, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the game area is limited in a wide range in order to avoid erroneous winning in the specific area 73.

  In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of avoiding erroneous entry of game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the route constructing means includes a predetermined delay means, even when the vertical length of the route constructing means in the front view is shortened to save space, the route constructing means is entered. It is possible to secure a long time until the game ball that has been passed passes through the means to be passed.

  Therefore, the timing at which it is necessary to operate the state switching means to switch whether or not the game ball can enter the passed means can be made a predetermined time after the game ball has entered the path forming means. An erroneous winning can be avoided without operating the switchgear for switching whether or not to enter the component means for a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening / closing means is operating swiftly. Thereby, it is possible to avoid erroneous entry of game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

  The mode of the delay means is not limited at all. For example, the aspect which comprises the convex part for deceleration in a flow-down path | route may be sufficient, and the aspect provided with the predetermined | prescribed flow-down path | route which makes a game ball flow down in the flow-down path | route which has a front-back direction component may be sufficient.

  In the gaming machine C1, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow path is a game ball that flows down in the flow path toward the front side compared to the flow path toward the back side. The gaming machine C2 is configured to increase the acceleration of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, it is possible to ensure a long period for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

  The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the inclination of the predetermined downflow path with respect to the horizontal plane may be large or the surface shape of the predetermined downflow path on the game ball side may be designed.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow path is compared to the flow path that flows down while maintaining the front-rear position in the flow path toward the front side. Thus, the gaming machine C3 is configured to increase the acceleration of the game ball flowing down.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to ensure a long period for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing on the near side. Thereby, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

  The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the inclination of the predetermined downflow path with respect to the horizontal plane may be large or the surface shape of the predetermined downflow path on the game ball side may be designed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are positioned in front of the passing means in a predetermined direction when the game ball is positioned in front of the passing means. A gaming machine C4 that is configured to pass.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the visibility in the vicinity of the passing means can be reduced when the gaming ball is arranged at the front position. Thereby, attention to the range in the vicinity of the passing means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C4, a plurality of the front positions can be configured.

  According to the gaming machine C5, by arranging the game balls at a plurality of front positions, at least a part of the back game balls can be hidden by the front game balls. Since the means to be passed is arranged on the back side with respect to the game ball on the back side, the field of view toward the means to be passed can be blocked by a plurality of game balls, and the visibility of the means to be passed can be reduced. .

  In this case, when the pitch of the game balls entering the predetermined flow path is short, it is possible to configure a state in which the game balls are always arranged at any one of the front positions, so that the passing means is invisible. It becomes possible.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the path forming means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a spiral shape when viewed from above.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the vertical width required for arranging the path construction means having the same length can be shortened.

  In addition, since it is not necessary to reduce the thickness of the path wall compared to the case where the folded path is formed, the strength of the flow path can be improved, and compared to the folded path folded at 180 degrees, It is possible to reduce the possibility of clogging of balls.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the path construction means includes a front-rear flow path portion that extends in the front-rear direction.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the right and left width of the path configuration means can be suppressed, and therefore, the left and right widths of the pair of path configuration means are suppressed symmetrically. Can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the passing means is disposed obliquely downward and rearward with respect to a ball receiving portion of the path forming means.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, it is possible to easily fit the passing means and the ball receiving portion of the path forming means in the field of view of the player visually recognized from the front side. .

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the path configuration means is a first receiving means configured to be able to receive a game ball and a means different from the first receiving means and configured to be able to receive a game ball A second receiving means that is configured to change a profit obtained by the player according to a game ball receiving mode of the first receiving means and the second receiving means. Machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to always receive a game ball, and further, the first receiving means and Since the profit obtained by the player varies depending on the game ball receiving mode of the second receiving means, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball.

  In addition, the receiving mode of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which a game ball can be received limited to the first receiving means, a mode in which a game ball can be received limited to the second receiving means, or a predetermined number can be received in the first receiving means and the second receiving can be performed. A mode in which a predetermined number is accepted by the means may be employed. Moreover, the aspect in which the frequency of entering with respect to each receiving means may differ may be sufficient, and the aspect from which an entrance position differs may be sufficient.

  In the gaming machine C9, a change in profits obtained by the player is limited to one of the first receiving means and the second receiving means, and a game ball is received, or the first receiving means and the second receiving means The game machine C10 is generated depending on whether the game ball is accepted by both of the game machines.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C9, it is possible to make it easier for the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined launch mode, depending on how the profit obtained by the player is set. .

  In addition, as a profit which a player obtains, it is not limited at all. For example, it may be the ease of recognizing a flowing game ball, or a profit related to a game obtained by a flowing game ball (awarding of a prize ball, winning a jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is ended, The game state may be a normal state (falling down, etc.).

  In the gaming machine C9 or C10, the path configuration means is configured such that the first receiving means and the second receiving means to the passing means are symmetrically configured.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C9 or C10, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player suffers a disadvantage regardless of which of the right and left is used to fire the game ball.

  In any one of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the path forming unit includes an acceptance state changing unit configured to be capable of changing a state between an accepting state in which a flowing game ball can be accepted and a non-accepting state in which the game ball cannot be accepted. The gaming machine C12 is characterized in that the receiving mode changes depending on the shape of the receiving status changing means or the mode of the status change.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the receiving mode changes depending on the shape of the receiving state changing means or the mode of changing the state. The influence of the skill level on the profit obtained by the player can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C12, the gaming machine C13 is characterized in that the state of change of the acceptance state changing means is constituted by a plurality of types.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C12, even if the game ball is being fired in a certain launch mode, the mode of accepting the game ball to the first receiving unit and the second receiving unit Can be changed. Thereby, the profit which a player can obtain can be adjusted from the aspect of the state change of the acceptance state changing means.

<Points about the opening and closing member that moves parallel to the flow direction of the sphere>
A path configuration means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; a passed-through means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path configuration means to pass; an introduction state capable of introducing a game ball into the path configuration means; and State switching means configured to be able to change the state between a non-introduced state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the path forming means, and the state switching means has a direction of displacement caused by the change in the state of the game ball flowing down A gaming machine XA1 that is configured to follow a direction.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a prize winning part 300 that can configure a plurality of types of flow paths of gaming balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the flow direction of the game ball and the open / close direction of the open / close plate of the prize winning component 300 are substantially perpendicular, and the opening / closing operation is completed without involving the rolling of the game ball. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening / closing plate (state switching means).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XA1, since the direction of the displacement of the state switching unit is configured to be along the flow-down direction of the game ball, the state where the game ball is in proximity to or in contact with the state switching unit By causing the displacement of the switching means, it is possible to influence the rolling mode of the game ball to be changed. Thereby, the role of a state switching means can be improved.

  For example, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means is slid to the right while the game ball is on the top, so that the game ball moves in the forward direction of rolling rotation. Since the load to rotate is given, a game ball can be accelerated.

  Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means is slid to the left while the game ball is on the top, so that the rolling rotation of the game ball is reduced. Since a load for rotating in the reverse direction is applied, the rotation of the game ball can be delayed.

  Further, when the state switching means slides so that the lower end of the rolling game ball is slid, not only the rolling direction of the gaming ball but also a load having a component in the direction orthogonal to the rolling direction is applied to the gaming ball. Therefore, a change in the flow-down mode of the game ball can be complicated and irregular.

  Due to the influence on the flow mode of these game balls, the flow mode of the ball on the state switching unit can be changed variously during the opening / closing operation of the state switching unit, so that the player who visually recognizes the game ball is bored. You can concentrate on the game without.

  Further, the arrangement relationship between the opening / closing operation of the state switching means and the game ball is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged so as to rub against the side of the game ball, or may be arranged so as to collide with the game ball against the game ball in the flow direction.

  In the state switching means that is displaced in a manner of colliding with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, the game ball may be configured to be closed in a direction opposite to the direction in which the game ball flows down, and rebound from the game ball. May be configured to be capable of being regulated with less resistance.

<Points about the opening and closing member that flows the ball in the first direction when opened, and the second direction when closed>
A path configuration means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; a passed-through means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path configuration means to pass; an introduction state capable of introducing the game ball into the passed-through means; and State switching means configured to be able to change the state in a non-introduced state in which the game ball cannot be introduced into the passed means, and the state switching means is capable of guiding the game ball in the first direction in the introduced state. The gaming machine XB1 is configured to be capable of guiding the game ball in the second direction in the non-introduced state.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a prize winning part 300 that can configure a plurality of types of flow paths of gaming balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right in a state where the lower movable body 371 protrudes to the front side, but in the state of retreating to the rear side, it does not come into contact with the game ball and falls freely. And no guidance. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, in the state of being retracted to the rear side, it is necessary to prepare a part (frame portion or the like) for guiding the flow of the game ball other than the lower movable body 371, and for guiding the flow of the game ball There is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XB1, the state switching means is configured to guide the game ball in different directions between the introduction state and the non-introduction state, so that it is dedicated for guiding the flow path of the game ball Since members can be made unnecessary, the number of necessary components (members) can be reduced. Thereby, diversification of the flow direction of the game ball can be achieved in a limited space.

  The relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited at all. For example, the angle between directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction set in the left-right direction with respect to game balls flowing down along the front-rear direction. In this case, in front view, the difference in direction after the guidance by the state switching means is started is maximized while the displacement of the game ball is slightly recognized before being guided by the state switching means. Can be achieved.

  There is no limitation on the arrangement of the guide portions that cause the guide action by the state switching means. For example, the guide part may be disposed on the movable member provided in the state switching unit, or the guide unit is disposed on the non-movable part around the state switching unit, and the game ball is moved to the guide unit by the operation of the movable member. You may comprise so that it can switch to the state which is easy to adjoin or contact | abut.

  When the guide part is disposed on the movable member, the design is not limited to the guidance after the state switching between the introduction state and the non-introduction state is completed, and also takes into account the influence on the game ball during the state switching operation. It is preferable to do.

  For example, when the state switching means includes a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the game ball, a surface (planar surface, curved surface, etc.) that is inclined with respect to the flow direction rather than providing a planar wall portion orthogonal to the flow direction. It is easier to avoid a situation in which the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction in which the game ball flows backward by providing the wall portion having the shape. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid backflow of the game ball.

<Separation, reversal, coalescence, and rotation are a series of operations>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable so that a surface to be visually recognized changes, and the displacement means includes a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and the first displacement in a predetermined mode of displacement. A gaming machine D1, wherein the member and the second displacement member are configured to be relatively displaced.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a rotation base 214 disposed at a distal end portion of a base arm 220 is configured to be able to rotate a plurality of times (see, for example, JP-A-2006-116782). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, although the rotation base 214 is rotationally displaced, the surface visible to the player side is the same, so there is a problem that it is difficult to maintain the attention to the displacement means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the surface visually recognized by the displacement means is configured to be changeable with the displacement, so that attention to the displacement means can be maintained.

  Moreover, since the external appearance of a displacement means can be changed because the 1st displacement member and the 2nd displacement member carry out relative displacement, the attention with respect to a displacement means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1, the displacement of the predetermined mode includes a first displacement that approaches and separates with respect to a gathering portion where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are collectively arranged, and the first displacement member and the A gaming machine D2, wherein the second displacement member includes at least a second displacement that rotates with respect to the collective portion.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, it is possible to easily cause the relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member to occur dynamically. That is, as the displacement with reference to the aggregate portion, the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily reduced at the terminal portion where the distance from the aggregate portion is the shortest or longest only by the first displacement. When the first displacement member and the second displacement member stop and appear, and the production effect may be lowered, mixing the second displacement can cause a displacement in the rotational direction even at the terminal portion. Therefore, the production effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the displacement in the predetermined mode includes at least a third displacement in which a surface to be visually recognized of the displacement means is reversed.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the decoration visually recognized by the player before and after the third displacement is significantly different by reversing the surface visually recognized by the third displacement. Can be made.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixable by suction or adhesion, and the load related to the fixation is the first displacement member and the second displacement member A gaming machine D4 characterized by acting in a direction that restricts displacement of members.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the load related to fixing acts in a direction that restricts the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member. In consideration of the above, the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be designed.

  For example, in the case of transmission of driving force approaching a gear, when a mechanical displacement occurs when deformation of the shape is not taken into account, if a load related to fixation is taken into account, the elastic change of the member due to the load becomes obvious Thereby, the delay of the displacement timing of a member can be produced.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the degree of fixation may differ corresponding to the surface where the 1st displacement member and the 2nd displacement member are visually recognized.

  In this case, since the effect of fixing differs depending on the surface that is visually recognized, it is possible to provide strength to the degree of fixing on the side surface where the player is visually recognized.

  Thereby, for example, with respect to the inverted surfaces of the same displacement means, one surface is tightly united and easy to see integrally, and the other surface is loosely united and easy to visually recognize in a state where relative displacement is easy. Can do.

  In addition, for example, by configuring the first displacement member and the second displacement member so that the degree of adsorption is different for each fixed position, the first displacement member and the second displacement member may be fixed differently. it can.

  In addition, the aspect which enables adsorption | suction is not limited at all. For example, a mode of bonding with an adhesive tape may be used, or a method using an attractive force between a magnet and a metal part may be used. Further, the first reversing member or the second reversing member may be designed so that, for example, a fixing screw, a screw, or the like is used as the metal portion that is attracted to the magnet.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacing means is configured to be displaceable in the forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, the displacing means is displaced in the first displacement mode in the forward direction and the first in the reverse direction. Displacement is performed in a second displacement mode different from the displacement mode, and the second displacement mode is configured to be displaced in the first displacement mode after being displaced in a predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is arranged before the first displacement mode. Since it is configured as a displacement mode in which the predetermined mode is added, the amount of displacement required for the displacement unit when the displacement unit is retracted can be reduced. Thereby, since the attention to the displacement means at the time of retraction can be reduced, the attention of the displacement means that is displaced at the effect position can be relatively improved.

  In the conventional machine, the rotation mode is the same in the forward and reverse directions, so after projecting to the effect position (front side position of the liquid crystal display area) and before retreating to the retreat position (outside position of the liquid crystal display area) It was necessary to rotate again several times in the opposite direction. In this case, there is a possibility that the line of sight tends to gather on the member retracted from the effect position.

  The displacement mode is not limited at all. For example, rotational displacement or linear motion displacement may be used. Further, the displacement may be on a plane, may extend over a plurality of planes, or may be a three-dimensional one.

  In the gaming machine D5, the displacing means includes release means configured to release load transmission when the operating resistance exceeds a predetermined amount.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed by the magnitude of the operating resistance of the internal configuration of the displacement means.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, a light emitting means for irradiating light toward the displacement means is provided, the displacement means comprising the first displacement member and the second displacement member, the first displacement member and the The gaming machine D7, wherein the second displacement member is configured so that a visual aspect of light from the light emitting means can be changed depending on whether the surface to be visually recognized is one side or the other side.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means corresponds to the surface where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized. Can be changed.

  For example, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as individually emitting light, and when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as integrally emitting light, Can be changed.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 includes a detecting unit that detects an arrangement of the displacing unit, and the detecting unit is configured to detect whether or not the displacement of the displacing unit is in an allowable state. Characteristic gaming machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, since the detection unit can detect a state in which the displacement unit can be allowed to be displaced, the displacement unit collides with a surrounding structure portion during the displacement. It can be avoided.

  In addition, since the displacement of the displacement means can be executed while detecting the section in which the displacement means can be detected by the detection means, the displacement means includes enlargement / reduction after being displaced from the rendering position to the retracted position to some extent. By controlling so as to be displaced, it is possible to suppress an increase in attention to the displacing means when displacing from the production position to the retracted position as compared with a displacement mode including enlargement / reduction from the start of the displacement. .

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 includes a detecting unit that detects a state of the displacement unit, and the detection unit is configured to be capable of detecting two or more kinds of numerical values with respect to the displacement of the displacement unit. A gaming machine D9.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D7, the number of detection means can be reduced. In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a kind of numerical value about the displacement of a displacement means. For example, it may be a numerical value regarding the arrangement or posture of each of the different movable members, or may be a numerical value related to a change in the operation mode when the operation mode changes at a predetermined timing.

  Further, the arrangement of the detection means is not limited at all. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure for detecting the arrangement and posture of the second displacement means connected to the displacement distal end side of the displacement means.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member have one side facing the player side. When the first displacement member and the second displacement member have one side facing the player side, the first and second displacement members are configured so as to be able to reversely move between the posture that becomes the surface and the posture that becomes the other surface. While it is possible to distinguish between the displacement member and the second displacement member, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member have the other side facing the player side, the first displacement member and the second displacement member Is configured to be indistinguishable.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the reversing operation is performed regardless of the state of the first displacement member and the second displacement member when one side is directed to the player side. It is possible to maintain a high player's expectation for the occurrence of the problem.

<Points for changing the easy-to-view surface by disposing a displacement means having a plurality of surfaces to be viewed>
Displacement means comprising a first viewable surface and a second viewable surface configured to be visible, and the displacement means, according to the arrangement, the first state in which the first viewable surface is easily visible, A gaming machine E1 configured to be switchable between a second state in which the second visually recognizable surface is easily visible.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes a reversing operation unit 71 configured to be reversible and configured to change an appearance visually recognized by a player by changing a visually recognized surface (for example, JP, 2013-153095, A). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the reversal of the reversing operation unit 71 is performed in a state where the position is fixed, and therefore the player's line of sight cannot be changed by the change in the surface to be visually recognized. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the player's line of sight.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the displacement means switches between a state in which the first visually recognizable surface is easily visible and a state in which the second visually recognizable surface is easily visible according to the arrangement. The line of sight of a player who wants to see the visually recognizable surface or the second visually recognizable surface can be changed in a manner along the path of the change in the arrangement of the displacement means.

  The gaming machine E1 includes an opening portion that is opened so that the displacement means can be visually recognized, and the displacement means is configured so that the opening portion side is easily visible.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, a player who visually recognizes the back side through the opening can easily visually recognize the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

  In the gaming machine E2, the displacement means is arranged closer to the back side when arranged on the edge side of the opening part than when arranged on the center side of the opening part. .

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, when the displacement means is arranged on the center side of the opening portion, the displacement means can be seen largely on the front side, while the displacement means is on the edge side of the opening portion. When arranged, the movement of the line of sight when viewing the displacement means can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to achieve both the visibility of the displacement means and the suppression of the fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the displacement means includes a plurality of sets of the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface, and one set of the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface. The gaming machine E4 is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize another set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface in a state where the surface is visible.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the first and second visually recognizable surfaces are provided with different characters and figures for each group, thereby displacing means. It is possible to make a player who visually recognizes a different character or figure, and it is difficult to visually recognize the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface that are not intended to be visually recognized. Thus, it is possible to avoid the appearance of the displacement means from being completely lost.

  For example, in the first group, characters and figures indicating that the lottery result is a big hit and the expectation is low are displayed on the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface, and in the second group, the lottery result Is displayed on the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface, regardless of the disposition of the displacement means, the expectation of the jackpot is expected through the displacement means. High and low can be confirmed. In this case, even after the displacing means is retracted from the front side of the display area of the display device, it is possible to maintain the display of the big hit expectation by the displacing means. In addition, it is possible to continue displaying the display about the expectation of jackpot.

  In addition, the aspect which is hard to visually recognize is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged on a surface different from the player side (rear side surface, left and right outer surface, etc.), or may be configured to reduce visibility by shielding with a shielding means.

  In the gaming machine E4, the operation of switching the pair of the first visually recognizable surface and the second visually recognizable surface that are visually recognized does not easily recognize the first visually recognizable surface and the second visually recognizable surface during the operation. A gaming machine E5 that is configured.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in the gaming machine E4, the first viewable surface displayed on the player side during the operation of switching the set of the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface (before confirmation). And it can make it easy to avoid predicting the set of the 2nd visually recognizable surface. Thereby, the attention with respect to a displacement means can be improved.

  It should be noted that the aspect configured so that the first visually recognizable surface and the second visually recognizable surface are not easily recognized during the switching operation described above is not limited at all. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at high speed to make it difficult to recognize, or a part of the first viewable surface (second viewable surface) and the other part are configured to be separable and separated. It may be difficult to recognize by operating in a state where the part and the other part are separated, or may be made difficult to be recognized by creating a relatively dark part by setting light and darkness by the light emitting means.

  In this case, the state of the separated state is not limited at all. For example, during the switching operation described above, only one of the first viewable surface (second viewable surface) and the other portion is visually recognized, and the other is operated so as not to be visually recognized. You may comprise so that those one part and other parts can be visually recognized simultaneously, but you may comprise so that it may operate | move in the state visually recognized by arrangement | positioning shifting | deviating.

  The gaming machine E5 is provided with an opening portion that allows the displacement means to be opened so as to be visible, and the switching operation is performed in a state where the displacement means is disposed on the center side of the opening portion. Game machine E6.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E5, it is possible to make the switching operation easily visible to the player, and it is possible to improve attention to the switching operation.

  In the gaming machine E5 or E6, during the switching operation, one part of the first viewable surface and the other part faces the front side, and the other faces the side different from the front side. A gaming machine E7.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E5 or E6, a part of the first viewable surface is visible during the operation, and the whole is not visible, so that the first visual recognition is possible during the operation. Possible surfaces can be made difficult to recognize.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the game apparatus includes second displacement means configured to shield at least a part of the line of sight to the second viewable surface, and the displacement means includes the second displacement means and the second displacement means. 1 A gaming machine E8 configured to be switchable to a third state for visually recognizing a visually recognizable surface.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the second displacement means makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the second viewable surface, so that the effect position of the displacement means can be changed. The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the displacement means is configured to change a surface visually recognized in a predetermined direction between the first visually recognizable surface and the second visually recognizable surface in accordance with the displacement. A gaming machine E9.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the surface visually recognized in the predetermined direction view changes between the first visible surface and the second visible surface. It is possible to arbitrarily change the surface that is easily visible without depending on the amount of change in the line of sight of the person.

  In the gaming machine E9, the gaming machine E10 is characterized in that an attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E9, the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state can be increased by changing the posture of the displacement means. it can.

  The gaming machine E9 or E10 includes auxiliary means configured to be arranged close to the displacement means. In the first state, the displacement means is arranged close to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means Is arranged apart from the auxiliary means, a gaming machine E11.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E9 or E10, there are a state in which the auxiliary means is arranged close to the displacing means and viewed integrally, and a state in which the auxiliary means and the displacing means are separately viewed. A plurality of impressions given to the player by the displacement means can be configured.

  In addition, the aspect of an auxiliary | assistant means is not limited at all. For example, a fixed arrangement may be used, or a movable means may be used.

  In the gaming machine E11, the auxiliary means is configured to be switchable between a state of being visually recognized integrally with the displacement means and a state of being visually recognized separately from the displacement means. .

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E11, it is possible to switch between the displacement means and the auxiliary means to be viewed integrally or separately, so that the variation of the visible mode with respect to the number of members Can be increased.

<Point where the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means and the displacement amount of the disposing means at the same point is different in each section>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable, disposition means on which the first portion is disposed, and support means for supporting the second portion of the disposition means, the support means Is configured to be capable of controlling the arrangement of the second part with respect to the first part during the displacement of the displacement means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base arm 220 that can be tilted and displaceable, a rotating accessory 211 that is rotatably attached to a tilting tip side of the base arm 220, and the rotating accessory 211 are rotated. There is a gaming machine that includes a drive motor 222 that generates a drive force for rotation, and is configured to be able to rotate the rotating accessory 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220 (for example, JP-A-2006-116782). See the publication). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the rotating combination 211 is likely to wobble at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the rotating combination 211 is rotated during the tilting displacement of the base arm 220, a malfunction may occur in the mechanism. As a result, since it is assumed that the rotational displacement of the rotational accessory 211 is performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, the degree of freedom of the displacement is low.

  That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the displaceable portion.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the disposing means is supported by the displacement means and the support means at at least two points, and the two support points are relatively displaced during the displacement of the displacement means. Since the arrangement of the second part with respect to the first part can be controlled by the support means, the arrangement means can be displaced during the displacement of the displacement means while stably supporting the arrangement means. Can do. Thereby, the freedom degree of design of the arrangement | positioning means (part which can be displaced) can be raised.

  In addition, the aspect of a support means is not limited at all. For example, the guide groove formed in the fixed base means may be supported in a manner in which the displacement is limited, or may be supported by being connected to a displaceable second displacement means. Further, the control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, and includes mechanical control such as restricting (guiding) the displacement of the second portion with the wall portion.

  In the gaming machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be capable of displacing the first section and the second section, and the support means is configured to move the second portion when the displacement means displaces the first section. And a second range for supporting the second portion when the displacing means displaces the second section, and the second portion is displaced in the first range. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the direction and the direction in which the second portion is displaced in the second range are different.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the disposing means can be varied, and the support means Since the change in the displacement direction of the second portion is allowed, the displacement of the disposing means can be made smooth even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the supporting means includes a limiting unit that limits the displacement of the second portion.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the displacement of the second portion can be limited at the boundary position (limitation part) between the first range and the second range, so the second When the portion is displaced from the large displacement side to the small displacement side, the second portion can be easily stopped at the boundary position (limitation portion) between the first range and the second range.

  In addition, the aspect of the load required for the displacement based on the first portion of the second portion is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the second portion is pulled may be used, or a mode in which the second portion is pushed forward may be used.

  In addition, the aspect of a restriction | limiting part is not limited at all. For example, an aspect in which the increase or decrease of the displacement resistance of the second part may be set, or an aspect in which the displacement direction of the second part is switched may be used.

  In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the first section is disposed closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the disposing means based on the displacement means in the second section. The gaming machine F4 is configured such that the relative displacement amount of the first section is smaller than the relative displacement amount of the disposing means with reference to the displacement means in the first section.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, a section in which the relative displacement amount of the disposing means relative to the disposing means is small can be formed at the midway of the displacement means. Therefore, in addition to the displacement end position of the displacement means, it is possible to provide a position where the displacement means and the disposition means can be easily visually recognized. As a result, the displacement means and the disposition means can be visually recognized as a single body. Easy positions can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the gaming machine F5 is configured so that the displacement speed (ratio) of the second part with respect to the displacement speed of the first part can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the second portion of the disposing means on the support means side Therefore, it is possible to configure an operation effect that makes the displacement speed of the disposing means variable by simple driving control (constant speed driving) of the driving means.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the supporting means is configured to reduce a displacement speed at a displacement end of the second portion.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F5, the second portion can be prevented from bouncing back, and the disposing means can be easily stopped early at the end of the displacement.

  Note that the method for preventing the second portion from bouncing back is not limited at all. For example, a technique may be adopted in which the displacement speed of the second portion at the end of displacement (for example, the amount of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) is reduced. A technique may be used in which the displacement of the second part is regulated by a geometric device such as raising a wall in the displacement direction of the second part when the first part is stopped.

  Further, the displacement resistance of the second portion may be increased without being limited to the method of reducing the displacement amount of the second portion. For example, a load may be applied by a magnetic force or the like at the end of displacement of the second portion to improve the displacement resistance of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be improved by an urging force of a coil spring or the like. good.

  In the gaming machine F6, the support means includes a displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second portion accompanying the displacement of the first portion, and the second portion when the first portion stops at the end of displacement. A gaming machine F7, wherein the displacement trajectories of the displacement are configured to intersect.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F6, the support means having the function of guiding the displacement of the second part accompanying the displacement of the first part causes the first part to stop when the first part stops. The return displacement (bound) of the portion 2 can be reduced.

  One of the gaming machines F1 to F7 includes supported means that is displaceably supported by the disposing means, and the supported means has a relative displacement amount of the disposing means with respect to the displaceable means. A gaming machine F8 configured to be displaced by a corresponding amount of displacement.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a complicated presentation can be executed by the supported means that is displaced together with the arranging means.

  The mode of displacement of the supported means is not limited at all. For example, it may be displaced so as to run in parallel with the disposing means on a predetermined plane where the disposing means is displaced, or a displacement mode of the disposing means (for example, at a position away from the predetermined plane where the disposing means is displaced). Further, a different displacement mode (for example, a rotational displacement mode about a predetermined axis) may be used.

  Note that the manner of displacement of the disposing means according to the amount of displacement of the disposing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a posture change or a displacement while maintaining the posture.

  In the gaming machine F8, the second portion includes a section that can be reciprocally displaced in a direction intersecting a displacement locus of the first portion while the first portion is displaced in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine F9.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F8, the relative displacement amount of the second part with respect to the first part returns and changes while the first part is displaced (for example, after the increase) Therefore, it is possible to realize a displacement mode in which the displacement of the supported means is increased while maintaining the arrangement of the second portion.

  In the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement speed of the (relative) rotation of the supported means relative to the arrangement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means. F10.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement mode of the supported means can be equivalent to the displacement means with the arrangement means interposed therebetween. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that the supported means is displaced by the unique driving means.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the disposing means includes posture changing means for changing the posture so as to switch the surface facing the player side between the first surface and the second surface with its own displacement, The posture changing means is configured to be in a posture in which the first surface or the second surface is directed toward the player in a state where the second portion is disposed at the end of displacement. Machine F11.

  According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the first surface or the second surface of the posture changing means is directed to the player side, so that the second portion becomes the end of displacement. Since the player can grasp that it has arrived, the end stage of the rendering operation by the displacement means can be configured in an easy-to-understand manner.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F11, the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, a medal or the like.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F11, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F11, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board (part of area composition means)
65b Opening / closing plate (part of introducing means, receiving state changing means, avoiding means)
86 Center frame (open part)
141 Previous design member (part of partitioning means and avoiding means)
163b Sphere passage hole (first receiving means, second receiving means)
312 Opening (second predetermined part, ball receiving part)
317 Longitudinal projecting portion (part of first flow path, part of projecting portion, second projecting portion, part of state switching means)
318 Left and right inner protrusions (part of branching means, part of protrusions, first protrusion, part of state switching means)
319 Left and right outer protrusions (part of the second flow down path, part of the state switching means)
310 Upper member (part of the path construction means)
330 Middle member (part of delay means, part of path construction means)
334 1st flow path component (part of path configuration means, front and rear flow path)
335 second flow path component (predetermined part, part of the path component, left-right direction path)
336 Third flow path component (part of path configuration means, front-rear direction path, front-rear flow path portion)
351 Light emitting means 370 Slide displacement member (part of branching means, switching means, part of state switching means)
380 Lower member (part of the path construction means)
600 First operation unit (displacement means)
616 Guide slot (supporting means)
616a Straight part (part of support means, first range, restriction part)
616b Curved part (part of support means, second range, limiting part)
620 Rotating member (displacement means)
640 Supported member (part of arrangement means)
642 Tubular part (first part)
652 Front rotating member (supported means)
652b Overhang decoration part (part of auxiliary means)
660 Second decorative rotating member (posture changing means)
661a First effect surface (first visible surface, first surface)
661b Second effect surface (second visible surface, second surface)
670 Decoration fixing member (part of auxiliary means)
700 Second operation unit (displacement means)
787a1 first main decorative surface (a part of the first visible surface)
787a2 first sub-decoration surface (part of second visible surface)
787b1 second main decorative surface (a part of the first visible surface)
787b2 second auxiliary decorative surface (part of the second visible surface)
800 Third operation unit (displacement means, second displacement means)
813 Detection sensor (detection means)
823b Outside light emitting part (light emitting means)
840 Outer rotating member (part of gathering part)
866 Torque limiter (release means)
870 1st decoration member (1st displacement member, 2nd displacement member)
875 1st covering part (a part of surface visually recognized)
880 Second decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
885 2nd covering part (part of surface visually recognized)
C1 color (part of arrangement means, second part)
C2 Dish-shaped lid (part of arrangement means, second part)
P1 sphere (part of displaceable means)
SE11 Probability detection sensor (part of the passing means)
SE12 Normal detection sensor (part of the passing means)

Claims (3)

A path configuration means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, a passed-through means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path configuration means to pass, and a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the passed-through means; State switching means configured to be switchable between a second state different from the first state,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the path forming means includes delay means for delaying the vertical displacement of the game ball, and the delay means allows the game ball to flow down toward the passing means. The delay means comprises a plurality of predetermined flow paths,
2. The predetermined flow-down path is configured such that the flow-down path toward the front side has a greater acceleration of the game ball flowing down than the flow-down path toward the back side. Game machines. The delay means comprises a plurality of predetermined flow paths,
The predetermined flow path is configured such that the flow path toward the front side is configured such that the acceleration of the game ball flowing down is larger than the flow path flowing down while maintaining the front-rear position. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.

Images